2019 BMW x3 19

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW X3.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402896703 - X/18

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW X3.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance .................................................................................................. 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state ..................................................... 41
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 44
BMW Gesture Control .................................................................................................. 53
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 56
General settings ............................................................................................................. 59
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................................... 102
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 115
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 120
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 140
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 157
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 164
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 192
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 197
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 233
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 234
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 249
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 256
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 260
4
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via
the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 270
Trailer towing ................................................................................................................ 275
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 279
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 288
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 290
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 296
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 325
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 328
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 332
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 334
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 336
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 344
Care ................................................................................................................................. 351
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 358
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 361
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 362
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 X/18, 11 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
6
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
7
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Orientation The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
lar topic is by using the index.
played on the Control Display. Additional
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in information, refer to page 72.
the first chapter.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
Updates made after the editorial The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
deadline scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
ences may exist between the printed Owner's and tablets.
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle. BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
Owner's Manual for Navigation, stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
Entertainment, Communication Guide Web can be displayed in any current
browser.
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Symbols and displays
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Additional sources of Symbol Meaning
information Precautions that must be followed in

order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
Dealer’s service center serious damage to the vehicle.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time. Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Internet "..." Texts in vehicle used to select
The Owner's Manual and general information on individual functions.
BMW, for example on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
8
Information NOTES
Symbol Meaning When using these functions and systems, the

applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served.
voice activation system.
For any options and equipment not described in
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
activation system. Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
Action steps answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your vehi‐
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
cle.
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1. First action step. Status of the Owner's

2. Second action step. Manual
Enumerations Basic information
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to
let points. ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
▷ First possibility. highest quality and safety standards. In rare
▷ Second possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
Updates made after the editorial
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Vehicle features and Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
options
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
This Owner's Manual describes all models and of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ For Your Own Safety
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in a vehicle, for example because of the Intended use
selected optional features or the country-specific
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
version.
▷ Owner's Manual.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
9
NOTES Information
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the If work is performed improperly, for instance
vehicle is driven. maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. quent damage and related safety risks.
Warranty Parts and accessories

Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
erating conditions and registration requirements sory products approved by BMW.
applying in the country of first delivery, also Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be their use and installation are available from a
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ BMW dealer's service center.
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
operating conditions and registration require‐ BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the cles.
homologation requirements in a certain country
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
sories.
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a dealer’s service center. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
Maintenance and repairs with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
WARNING these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint under all usage conditions.
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. California Proposition 65
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to Warning
property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs
California law requires vehicle manufacturers
on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐
provide the following warning:
formed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop only.
WARNING
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair work. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a State of California to cause cancer and birth
BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose to defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
use another service facility, BMW recommends tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
use of a facility that performs work, for instance products of component wear contain or emit
maintenance and repair, according to BMW chemicals known to the State of California to
specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
qualified service center or repair shop". lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can‐
10
Information NOTES
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ Detailed information about these warranties is
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused listed in the Service and Warranty Information
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
water. For more information go to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
tions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
WARNING the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
which are known to the State of California to mologation requirements. You should also be
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid exclusions for such country or region. In such
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ther information.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ Maintenance
hicle. For more information go to Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
WARNING ures:
Breathing Diesel Engine exhaust exposes you ▷ BMW Maintenance system.
to chemicals known to the State of California to ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ US models.
ductive harm. For more information go to
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/diesel.
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
Service and warranty these specifications, this could result in serious
We recommend that you read this publication damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐ ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. General information
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited hicle. Electronic control units process data they
Warranty. receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or
exchange with each other. Some control units
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
11
NOTES Information
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control components, for instance lights and brakes.
devices facilitate comfort or infotainment func‐ ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions. tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
Information about stored or exchanged data can ment of the driving stability control systems.
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
cle, in a separate booklet, for example.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐
Personal reference ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐
identification number. Depending on the country, tions.
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ The majority of this data is transient and is only
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other share of the data is stored event-related in event
options to track data collected in the vehicle to or fault memories.
the driver or vehicle owner, e.g. via the Connec‐
tedDrive account that is used. When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
Operating data in the vehicle read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. cle identification number.
For example, this includes: A dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator. out the data.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain The data is collected, processed, and used by
sensor signals. the relevant organizations in the service network.
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ The data documents technical conditions of the
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
stored beyond the operating period. compliance with warranty obligations and quality
improvement.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
nical information. Information about the vehicle monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐ bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
quirements or faults can be stored temporarily or ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
permanently. The data from the vehicle can also be used to
check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
This information generally records the state of a anty.
component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance: Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
reset when a dealer’s service center or another
▷ Operating states of system components, qualified service center or repair shop performs
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery repair or servicing work.
status.
12
Information NOTES
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
General information
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
For example, this includes: access to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
General information
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
an integrated hands-free system or an
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
integrated navigation system.
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations. phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle
can be deleted at any time. manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
lected settings for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
Incorporation of mobile end devices to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
control elements.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
The sound and picture from the mobile device
data above and beyond that needed to provide
can be played back and displayed through the
the services must always be based on a legal
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
permission, contractual arrangement or consent.
13
NOTES Information
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name,
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
Services from other providers during a crash investigation.
When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or
way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR.
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
Engine compartment
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
The vehicle identification number can be found
such data as:
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ side of the vehicle.
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
14
Information NOTES
Windshield also obtain other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 64.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
15
16
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance ............................................................................... 18
17
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Your BMW at a glance

Opening and closing All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

Buttons on the remote control system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the tailgate Buttons for the central locking system.
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode Locking
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Pressing the button locks the vehicle if
the front doors are closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Press the button on the remote control.
Unlocking
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Panic mode
button on the remote control again to unlock the
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
other vehicle access points.
self in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
mote control after unlocking.
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
as long as the button on the remote control is three times in succession.
pressed.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Locking the vehicle
18
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

with no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating Concept
the remote control. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
All you need to do is to have the remote control touch activation using the remote control you are
with you, such as in your pants pocket. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote Performing the foot movement
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outside of the tailgate.
Press the button on the remote control

for approx. 1 second.
19
Depending on the setting, the doors may be un‐ Adjusting the distance: manual head
locked. restraints
Closing
Press the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Seats, mirrors, and steering

wheel
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
Electrically adjustable seats straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Backrest width
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Backrest tilt
4 Lumbar support
1 Settings
Adjusting the head restraint 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting the height: power head
restraints
Push switch up or down.
20
Adjusting the steering wheel Displays and control

Manual steering wheel adjustment elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up. 1 Light switch element
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
Memory function 3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Concept
5 Start/Stop button
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
Indicator/warning lights
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Instrument cluster
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Storing
Several lights indicate function checks and light
1. Set the desired position. up only temporarily when standby state or
standby state are activated.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐
ing on the button lights up.
3. Press selected button 1 or 2 at the door while
the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press selected button 1 or 2.
21
Driver's door Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
1 Safety switch Press once: call up main menu.

2 Power windows Press twice: display all menu items of
3 Exterior mirrors the main menu.
4 Opening/closing the tailgate Open the Communication menu.

5 Central locking system
6 Memory function Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐

Switch console
gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐

play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.

1 Selector lever
2 Controller
Voice activation
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
4 Parking assistance systems Using the voice activation system
5 Driving Dynamics Control
Activating the voice activation system
iDrive 1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
Concept 2. Wait for the signal.
The iDrive combines the functions of many 3. Say the command.
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
22
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐ Switching off drive-ready state
cates that voice activation system is ac‐ Steptronic transmission:
tive.
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
If no other commands are possible, operate the hicle stopped.
function via iDrive.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Terminating the voice activation system The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐
Help on the voice activation system
gine off automatically while stationary to save
▷ To have the available spoken instructions fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. following preconditions:
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ Steptronic transmission:
ple of the voice activation system read out
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
accelerator pedal.
loud: ›Help‹.
Information for Emergency Parking brake

Requests
Setting
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, Pull the switch.
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can The LED and indicator light light up.
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Releasing
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
mirror. With drive-ready state switched on:
Steptronic transmission: press the switch
while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐
Driving tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Drive-ready state The parking brake is released.
Switching on drive-ready state

Parking
▷ Depress the brake pedal.
The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
▷ Press the Start/Stop button. cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
23
Steptronic transmission Engaging P

Engage selector lever position P only when the
Engaging selector lever position D, vehicle is stationary.
N, R
Press button P.
▷ Drive mode D.
▷ Neutral N. Steptronic transmission, Sport
▷ Reverse R. program and manual mode
With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
turns to the center position in each case.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent
shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐
vertent shifting from selector lever position P. Activate the sport program/manual mode:
Engage selector lever position R only when the Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
vehicle is stationary. lever position D.
Manual mode:
Releasing the selector lever lock ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
End the sport program/manual mode:

Push the selector lever to the right.
Press the button.
24
High beams, headlight flasher, Lights and lighting

turn signal
Light functions
High beams, headlight flasher
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Automatic headlight control.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
Adaptive light functions.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on. Low beams.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Instrument lighting.
Turn signal
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
in the opposite direction.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
25
Washer/wiper system Rain sensor
Switching the wipers on/off and Activating/deactivating

brief wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
Press the lever up until the desired position is standard position.
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0. Adjusting the sensitivity
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Press the lever down.

▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
26
Rear window wiper Button Function
Switching on Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog window.

Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. Rear window defroster.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ Seat heating.
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window Automatic climate control with

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. enhanced features
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to Button Function
its idle position when released. Temperature.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its interval position when released.
Climate control operation.

Climate control
Maximum cooling.
Automatic climate control
Button Function AUTO program.
Temperature.
Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Climate control operation. Air distribution, manual.
AUTO program. SYNC program.
27
Button Function Navigation destination entry

Defrost and defog window.
Entering a destination via address
Rear window defroster. State/province

1. "Navigation"
Active seat ventilation. 2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
Seat heating.
4. Move the Controller to the right to select the
state from the list.
Open the Climate menu.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Infotainment Example: entering the address via the town/city
1. "City/Postal code?"
Radio 2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
1 Changing the entertainment source 9. Select a house number or range of house
2 CD/DVD drive numbers from the list.
3 Eject CD/DVD
Starting destination guidance
4 Change station/track
"Start guidance"
5 Programmable memory buttons
If only the town/city was entered: destination
6 Sound output on/off, volume
guidance is started to the town/city center.
7 Waveband/satellite radio
Changing the waveband Connecting a mobile phone
General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons, voice activa‐
tion, and gestures.
28
Connecting the mobile phone via passkey Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
entry select: "Accept"
Via iDrive: ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
direction of the Control Display.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Dialing a number
3. "Mobile devices" 1. "Communication"
4. "Connect new device" 2. "Dial number"
5. Select the functions for which the mobile 3. Enter the numbers.
phone is to be used.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ tablished via the mobile phone to which this
played on the Control Display. function has been assigned.
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile Establish the connection via the additional
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's phone:
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
1. Press button.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
2. "Call via"
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
Apple CarPlay preparation
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
▷ Compare the control number displayed
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
on the Control Display with the control
and iDrive.
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
Functional requirements
and on the Control Display.
▷ Compatible iPhone.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
The device is connected and displayed in the ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
device list. ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Using the phone
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Accepting a call Via iDrive:
Incoming calls can be answered in several ways. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings"
"Accept" 3. "Mobile devices"
▷ Press the button on the steering 4. "Settings"
wheel.
5. Select the following settings:
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
29
▷ "Apple CarPlay" xx: comply with the current standard in each

case.
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. Wheels and tires
Select CarPlay as the function:
Tire inflation pressure specifications
"Apple CarPlay"
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
played in the device list. printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire inflation

Refueling pressure
With runflat tires:
Refueling
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Fuel cap With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
open it. sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. The friction during hard braking may produce
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
the fuel filler flap. can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
Gasoline ucts from BMW.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Electronic oil measurement
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐
allic additives.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
Information on the recommended fuel grade can
display appears when the engine is running or af‐
be found in the Owner's Manual.
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 mi‐
nutes.
Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with low sulfur content:
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
30
Displaying the engine oil level Providing assistance

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Hazard warning flashers
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
tion to these messages.
Adding engine oil
General information
The button is located in the center console.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Breakdown assistance
Adding
BMW Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ ConnectedDrive

played in the instrument cluster.
Concierge service
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
sage. The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
Observe recommended engine oil types. hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
31
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
32
33
34
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state .................................... 41
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 44
BMW Gesture Control ............................................................................... 53
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 56
General settings ......................................................................................... 59
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 72
35
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable
cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Safety switch 99 Front fog lights 161
2 Power windows 98 Light switch 157
Lights off
3 Exterior mirror operation 109
Daytime running lights 159
4 Opening/closing the tailgate 89
Parking lights 157
5 Lights
36
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight control 158 Steering and lane control assistant

Adaptive light functions 159 on/off 206
High-beam Assistant 160 Cruise control: store speed

Low beams 157
Pause or continue cruise control

Instrument lighting 161
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐

Right roadside parking light 158 tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐

Left roadside parking light 158 tance
With steering and lane control as‐

sistant: adjust distance
6 Central locking system
Unlock 86 Cruise control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 140

Locking 86 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
7 Seating comfort features
ment and Communication 8
Memory function 111
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
8 Steering column stalk, left
Voice activation system 56
Turn signal 127
Telephone, see Owner's Manual

High beams, head‐
for Navigation, Entertainment and
light flasher 127
Communication 8
High-beam Assistant 160 Thumbwheel for selection lists 149
12 Steering column stalk, right
Onboard Computer 150 Wipers 128
9 Steering wheel buttons, left Rain sensor 128

Cruise control on/off 197
Clean the windshield and head‐
Active Cruise Control on/off 199 lights 129
Rear window wiper in Canadian

models 130
37
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Rear window wiper 130 14 Horn, entire surface
Clean the rear window 130 15 Heated steering wheel 111
13 Switch drive-ready state on/ 16 Adjust the steering wheel 111

off 120
17 Unlock hood 326
Auto Start/Stop function 121
18 Glove compartment 257
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 46 5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for

2 Ventilation 241 Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 8
3 Hazard warning system 344
6 Automatic climate control 234
7 Controller with buttons 46
Intelligent Safety 168
4 Glove compartment 256
38
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
8 Parking brake 124 10 Driving Dynamics Control 137

SPORT driving mode
Automatic Hold 125 COMFORT driving mode
9 PDC Park Distance Control 211 ECO PRO driving mode
Without Surround View: rearview

camera 215 ADAPTIVE driving mode
Surround View 218
Crossing traffic warning 230 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Parking assistant 225 trol 192
Surround View: Panorama
View 218 11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 132
HDC Hill Descent Control 195
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 346 2 Glass sunroof 99
39
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger 5 Interior lights 161

airbag 167
4 Reading lights 162
40
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready

state
Vehicle features and Safety information
options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ing.
options or country versions. This also applies to In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
▷ Set the parking brake.
laws and regulations must be observed.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
General information curb.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
of the three states: wheel chock.
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
WARNING
▷ Drive-ready state.
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
Idle state traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
power consumers are deactivated. dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state

The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
41
AT A GLANCE Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes

place on the vehicle.
Standby state
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Concept
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of When standby state is switched on, most func‐
the front doors is opened when exiting the tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle. Desired settings can be adjusted.
The idle state is not automatically established

while a phone call is active.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
Establishing idle state when doors are opened from the outside.
opening the front doors

Display in the instrument cluster
Via iDrive:
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
1. "My Vehicle" ment cluster. The drivetrain is
2. "Vehicle settings" switched off and standby state
3. "Doors/Key" switched on.
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Manual idle state Drive-ready state

To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
trip: Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Follow further information on the drive-ready
state, refer to page 120.
Press and hold the button until
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out.
Switching on drive-ready state
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1. Depress the brake pedal.

42
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE

When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
ometer shows the current engine speed.
Switching off drive-ready state

Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive-
ready state. The vehicle switches into standby
state.
43
AT A GLANCE iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display
options
Letters and numbers
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Letters and numbers can be entered using the
cific and optional features offered with the series. Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's
It also describes features that are not necessarily display changes automatically.
options or country versions. This also applies to Symbol Function
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ or Change between capital and
ing these functions and systems, the applicable lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Concept Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
Entry comparison
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen. When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Safety information Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
WARNING which data is available.
Operating the integrated information systems ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
and communication devices while driving can tered in all languages that are available in
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control iDrive.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐ Activating/deactivating the
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
functions
stationary. Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
44
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Status information Entertainment
General information Symbol Meaning

The status field can be found in the upper area of CD/DVD player.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols. Music hard disk.
Bluetooth audio.
Status field symbols
USB audio interface.
Radio WiFi.
Symbol Meaning
Additional symbols
HD Radio station is being received.
Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on.
Check Control message.
Telephone The sound output has been
switched off.
Symbol Meaning
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
Incoming or outgoing call. tion.
Missed call. Checking the current vehicle posi‐
Signal strength of cellular network. tion.
Network search.
Split screen, split screen display
Cellular network is not available.
General information
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached. Additional information can be displayed in several
menus on the right side of the split screen dis‐
Roaming is active. play, the so-called split screen, for instance infor‐
SMS text message received. mation from the Onboard Computer.
The additional information remains visible even
Message received. when switching to another menu on the split
Reminder. screen.
Sending not possible. Switching on/off

Contacts are loaded.
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
45
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Selecting the display In the case of very high temperatures on the

The display can be selected in menus, where the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
split screen is supported. radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
screen is selected. ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting. Safety information
Specifying the number of displays NOTICE

It is possible to specify the number of displays. Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
screen is selected.
not place objects in the area in front of the
2. Press the Controller. Control Display.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
Switching on/off automatically
5. Move the Controller to the left.
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
Control elements In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
Overview minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending troller to switch it back on again.
on the equipment version
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Controller with navigation
the equipment version, with touchpad system
General information
Control Display
General information
menu items and enter the settings.
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
structions, refer to page 355.
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 51.
46
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Operation Button Function

▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
Open the Media/Radio menu.
ample.
Open destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Open navigation map.

play.
last.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Controller without navigation

system
General information
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐ menu items and enter the settings.
plays, for example.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.

Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
47
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Operating with the

Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in two directions to switch between dis‐

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Buttons on the Controller Adapting the main menu

Button Function 1. Press the button twice.
Press once: call up main menu. All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu. 2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
Open the Communication menu.
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Open the Media/Radio menu. Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
play. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
last.
Opening the ConnectedDrive menu.
48
iDrive AT A GLANCE
2. Press the Controller. 5. "Brightness"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
Changing between displays displayed.
After a menu item is selected, for instance 7. Press the Controller.
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left. Entering letters and numbers
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display. Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
▷ Press the button. 2. : confirm entry.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right. Deleting
New display is opened.
Symbol Function
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened. Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Opening recently used menus Hold the Controller down: delete all
Press and hold this button. letters or numbers.
The recently used menus are displayed. Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
Opening the Options menu the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
Press the button. played at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

The "Options" menu is displayed. All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
The menu consists of various areas: played on the left edge.
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen". 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu, The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
for instance for "Media/Radio". played.
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Operating via touchscreen
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered. General information
Via iDrive: The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
1. "My Vehicle"
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
2. "iDrive settings" objects.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
49
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Opening the main menu Via iDrive:

Tap on symbol. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Contents of main menu"
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Swipe to the left.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main ▷ Tap arrow.
menu. New display is opened.
Adapting the main menu Changing settings

1. Tap on symbol. Settings such as brightness can be changed via
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ the touchscreen.
played. Via iDrive:
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position 1. "My Vehicle"
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items 3. "Displays"
Tap desired menu item. 4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness"
6. To create the desired setting:
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Touch the symbol on the touchscreen.
Dynamic contents
A keyboard is displayed in the Control Dis‐
You can display dynamic contents within the
play.
menu items. The contents of the menu items
update automatically, e.g., the active destination 2. Enter letters and numbers.
guidance in the navigation. To access the dy‐
namic content directly, tap on the lower section
of the menu item.
50
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Deleting Entering letters and numbers

Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
Symbol Function ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter lowing:
or number. ▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
Tapping and holding the symbol for
make entries, it may be necessary to change
an extended period: delete all letters
between upper and lower-case letters, num‐
or numbers.
bers and characters, refer to page 49.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Operating navigation map Control Display.
The navigation map can be moved with the ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
touchscreen. accents or periods so that the letter can be
Function Operation clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
map. gers. ler.
Entering special characters

Touchpad
Input Operation
General information Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the ter. touchpad.
touchpad on the Controller.
Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
space. center of the touchpad.
Selecting functions
Via iDrive: Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
1. "My Vehicle"
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
2. "iDrive settings" score. lower area of the touchpad.
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select desired setting: Using the map
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. The map in the navigation system can be moved
▷ "Map": using the map. via the touchpad.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐ Function Operation
lecting the list field.
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
rection.
letters and numbers.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
map. pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
51
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
2. Press and hold the desired button

until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,

for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press and hold buttons 1 and simultane‐
ously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
52
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
BMW Gesture Control

Vehicle features and The gestures that are performed underneath the
interior mirror are captured by a camera in the
options roofliner.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐

cific and optional features offered with the series. Activating/deactivating
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Via iDrive:
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
ing these functions and systems, the applicable 2. "iDrive settings"
laws and regulations must be observed. 3. "Gestures"
4. "Gesture control"
Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
Settings
motion only using BMW Gesture Control.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Overview 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
53
AT A GLANCE BMW Gesture Control
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the Accept call.

direction of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list
during voice activation.
Confirm the "Resume guidance"
pop-up.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Con‐ Reject call.
trol Display in the direction of the front-passenger Close the pop-up.
side.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move forearm clockwise in a circular pat‐ Increase the volume.

tern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐ Reduce the volume.

lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐
ward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move Surround View: turn camera view.
hand horizontally to the right or left. This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ Individually assignable gesture.
ward.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror Assigning gesture individually

and next to the steering wheel.
Via iDrive:
Execute gestures clearly.
1. "My Vehicle"
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
54
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
4. "Function assignment"
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be distur‐
bed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 354.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
55
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and Functional requirements
options To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐
guage must be set via iDrive that is supported by
the voice activation system.
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily To set the language, refer to page 59.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Using the voice activation
ing these functions and systems, the applicable system
Activating the voice activation

Concept system
Most functions displayed on the Control Display 1. Press the button on the steering
can be operated by voice commands via the wheel.
voice activation system. The system supports 2. Wait for the signal.
you with announcements during input.
3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
General information cates that voice activation system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via No other commands may be available. In this
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ case, operate the function via iDrive.
tent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
Terminating the voice activation
the driver's side. system
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ Press the button on the steering wheel
structions to use with the voice activation or ›Cancel‹.
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters Using a smartphone via voice
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
activation
and speed.
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
used via voice activation.
voice activation system.
56
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Activate voice command response on the smart‐ ▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
phone for this purpose. ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
1. Press and hold the button on the ▷ To have help for the current menu read out
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. loud: ›Help‹.
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
Example: opening the tone
2. Release the button. settings
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display. The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
on the Control Display. needed.
2. Press button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands 3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands. Settings
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken. Setting the voice dialog
You may select list entries such as phone list en‐ You can set the system to use standard dialog or
tries via voice activation. Read these list entries a short version.
out loud exactly as they are shown in the respec‐
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
tive list.
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the 1. "My Vehicle"
Control Display: 2. "iDrive settings"
▷ Some possible commands for the current 3. "Language"
menu. 4. "Speech mode:"
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition. Activating voice recognition via
▷ Encrypted connection is not available. the server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
Help on the voice activation vides a dictation function and a natural method of
system entering destinations while improving the quality
▷ To have the available spoken instructions of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
57
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted ▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
connection and stored locally there. currently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Information for Emergency

2. "iDrive settings" Requests
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition" Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
Speaking during voice output the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
phone connection.
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 346,
rupted, for instance due to background noise or close to the interior mirror.
talking.
Via iDrive: Environmental conditions
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
3. "Language"
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
4. "Speaking during voice output" speaking.
Setting the language

The language to be used for voice activation and
system announcements can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.
Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
58
General settings AT A GLANCE
General settings
Vehicle features and 4. "Time zone:"
options
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Setting the time
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
ing these functions and systems, the applicable 2. "iDrive settings"
laws and regulations must be observed. 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
Language 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
Setting the language
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
Via iDrive:
are displayed.
1. "My Vehicle" 8. Press the Controller.
3. If necessary, "Language" Setting the time format
4. "Language:" Via iDrive:
5. Select the desired setting. 1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
rently used.
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer
to page 57. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Time Instrument cluster with

enhanced features: setting the
Setting the time zone clock time display
Via iDrive: The clock time can be displayed in analog or dig‐
ital form.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Date and time"
59
AT A GLANCE General settings
Via iDrive: Setting the date format

1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive:
2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays" 2. "iDrive settings"
4. "Instrument panel" 3. "Date and time"
5. "Time" 4. "Date format:"
6. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. rently used.
Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features, Setting the units of
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are measurement
updated automatically.
Via iDrive: Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
1. "My Vehicle"
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
2. "iDrive settings" ture.
3. "Date and time" Via iDrive:
4. "Automatic time setting"
1. "My Vehicle"
rently used.
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
Date 5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the date rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Activating/deactivating the
2. "iDrive settings" display of the current
3. "Date and time"
vehicle position
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
Concept
displayed.
If vehicle location has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
7. Make the settings for the month and year. Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
60
Activating/deactivating Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐

ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Selecting the contents of the

2. "Vehicle settings" main menu
3. "Vehicle tracking" For some menu items of the main menu, the dis‐
4. "Vehicle tracking" played contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
Activating/deactivating 2. "Contents of main menu"
popup windows 3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
rently used.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Via iDrive: Messages
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Concept
3. "Pop-ups" The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
rently used.
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
Control Display ▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
Brightness mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
Via iDrive: ▷ Service requirements messages.
1. "My Vehicle" Messages are additionally displayed in the status
field.
3. "Displays"
Retrieving messages
4. "Control display"
Via iDrive:
5. "Brightness at night"
1. "Notifications"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. 2. Select the desired message.
7. Press the Controller. The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
sage is displayed.
rently used.
61
Deleting messages Activating/deactivating

All messages, except Check Control messages, Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐ Via iDrive:
sages are displayed as long as they are relevant.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "Notifications"
3. "Data privacy"
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press button.
Deleting personal data in the
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
vehicle
notifications"
Concept
Settings
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
The following settings can be adjusted:
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ personal data can be permanently deleted using
sages will be permitted. iDrive.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
ity. General information
Via iDrive: Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
3. "Notifications"
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
Data protection ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
Data transfer ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
Concept
▷ Login accounts.
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for to 15 minutes.
some functions.
Functional requirement
General information Data can only be deleted while stationary.
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used. Deleting data
Only make these settings while stationary. Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
62
Via iDrive: Function Connec‐

1. "My Vehicle" tion type
2. "iDrive settings" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or

3. "Data privacy" iDrive. USB.
4. "Delete personal data" USB storage device: USB.
5. "Delete personal data" Exporting and importing driver
6. "OK" profiles.
7. Exit and lock the vehicle. Performing software updates.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ Exporting and importing stored
pleted. trips.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the dele‐ Playing music.
tion. Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
phone or the USB storage de‐
Canceling deletion vice.
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ WiFi hot‐
tion of the data.
cess. spot.
Use Apple CarPlay apps via Bluetooth

Connections iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring: WiFi

Concept
Showing the smartphone display
Various connection types are available for using on the Control Display.
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
The following connection types require one-time
the desired function.
pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
General information
▷ WiFi hotspot.
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The ▷ Apple CarPlay.
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ ▷ Screen Mirroring.
vice.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
Function Connec‐ on and connected to the vehicle.
tion type
Safety information
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth.
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive. WARNING
Using the smartphone Office Operating the integrated information systems
functions. and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
phone or the audio player. USB. Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
63
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use ▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
the systems and devices while the vehicle is be required on the device; refer to the own‐
stationary. er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Compatible devices Via iDrive:
General information 1. "My Vehicle"

Information on mobile devices compatible with 2. "iDrive settings"
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 3. "Mobile devices"
bluetooth.
4. "Settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
5. "Bluetooth®"
or deviating software versions.
Activating/deactivating telephone
Displaying the vehicle identification
functions
number and software part number
To use all supported functions of a mobile
When looking for compatible devices, you may
phone, the following functions must be activated
have to state the vehicle identification number
prior to pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle.
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings"
4. "Settings" 5. Select desired setting:
5. "Bluetooth® info" ▷ "Office"
6. "System information" Activate function to transmit short mes‐

sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
A software update, refer to page 70, can be
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
performed, if needed.
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
vehicle.
Bluetooth connection ▷ "Contact images"
Functional requirements Activate function to show the contact pic‐

tures.
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 64, with
Bluetooth interface. 6. Move the Controller to the left.
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is in

Pairing the mobile device with the
the vehicle.
vehicle
▷ The device is ready for operation.
Via iDrive:
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer
to page 64, and on the device. 1. "My Vehicle"
64
3. "Mobile devices" Delete all known Bluetooth connections from

4. "Connect new device" the device list on the mobile phone and start
a new device search.
5. Select functions:
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
▷ "Telephone"
has only a limited remaining battery life.
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
Charge mobile phone.
▷ "Apps"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
▷ "Screen Mirroring" function anymore.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
played on the Control Display.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of mobile phone operation.
the mobile device.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears ambient temperatures.
on the mobile device display.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
number is displayed or the control number vice.
must be entered.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
▷ Compare the control number displayed phone or additional phone function.
on the Control Display with the control
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
number on the display of the device.
played or why are they incomplete?
Confirm the control number on the device
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
and on the Control Display.
not yet complete.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
ber on the device and via iDrive.
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
The device is connected and displayed in the transmitted.
device list, refer to page 69.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
Frequently asked questions
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
All requirements are met and all required steps from social networks.
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
pected. stored is too high.
In this case, the following explanations can help: ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or notes.
connected?
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
65
Configure the mobile phone and connect it ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
with the telephone or additional phone func‐ tor into the USB interface.
tion. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐ ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
proved? chanical damage.
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on ▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
phone. that every device is operable on the vehicle.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charg‐ ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ing tray. ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐ device.
tings. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
If all points in this list have been checked and the niques, proper playback of the media stored
required function is still not available, contact the on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ anteed in all cases.
fied service center or repair shop. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
USB connection the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
General information ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to being used, settings may be required on the
the USB interface. USB storage device, refer to the owner's
▷ Mobile phones. manual of the device.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB storage devices. ▷ USB hard drives.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ USB hubs.

and exFAT are the recommended formats. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐ serts.
plied with charging current via the USB interface ▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
if the device supports this. Observe the maxi‐ ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
mum charge current of the USB interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐ Functional requirement
ces with data transfer: Compatible device, refer to page 64, with USB
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer interface.
to page 92.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio. Connecting the device
▷ Playing videos via USB video. Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 70. page 254.
Follow the following when connecting: The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 69.
66
WiFi hotspot The initial Internet use via the hotspot requires a
registration and possibly a data volume purchase
General information from a service provider.
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the hot‐ Depending on the country version, data volume
spot of the vehicle at the same time. can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Functional requirements All devices connected via the hotspot use this
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 64, with data volume.
WiFi interface.
Settings
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
The network name and hotspot code can be
▷ Registration and data contract with a service
changed. In addition, the network name can be
provider where required.
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle. ces.
▷ Standby state switched on. Via iDrive:
Activating the WiFi hotspot 1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings"

3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" 4. Press button.
3. "Mobile devices" 5. ▷ "Change hotspot key"
4. "Settings" Enter the desired hotspot code.
5. "Internet hotspot" ▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
Connecting device to WiFi hotspot
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Via iDrive:
Activate or deactivate the function.
1. "My Vehicle" 6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐
2. "iDrive settings" work name:
3. "Mobile devices" Select the symbol.
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot" Apple CarPlay preparation
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
Concept
played on the Control Display.
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
lect network name on the device.
and iDrive.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect. Functional requirements
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 64.
page 69.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
67
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
activated on the iPhone. tooth and under WiFi.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
CarPlay preparation. If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Via iDrive: fied service center or repair shop.
1. "My Vehicle" Screen Mirroring

3. "Mobile devices" General information
4. "Settings" Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
5. Select the following settings:
play.
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay" Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 64,
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay with Screen Mirroring interface.
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer ▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
to page 64. smartphone.
Select CarPlay as the function: ▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ Activating WiFi
played in the device list, refer to page 69. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for navi‐ 3. "Mobile devices"
gation, entertainment, communication. 4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle Wi-Fi®"
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps Pairing a smartphone with Screen
were completed in the specified order. Despite Mirroring
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
Via iDrive:
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help: 1. "My Vehicle"
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple 2. "iDrive settings"
CarPlay. When a new connection is established, 3. "Mobile devices"
CarPlay can no longer be selected. 4. "Connect new device"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device 5. "Screen Mirroring"
list.
68
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on Symbol Function

the Control Display.
"Internet hotspot"
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings
of the smartphone. "Apple CarPlay"
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the
"Screen Mirroring"
device display. Select the WiFi name of the
vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
The device is connected and displayed in the
paired and connected devices.
device list, refer to page 69.
Via iDrive:
Managing mobile devices 1. "My Vehicle"
General information
3. "Mobile devices"
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when 4. Select the desired device.
standby state is switched on. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the If a function is assigned to a device, the function
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
after recognition. vice that is already connected and the device will
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐ be disconnected.
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
er's manual of the device. Disconnecting the device
Via iDrive:
Displaying the device list
1. "My Vehicle"
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
3. "Mobile devices"
Via iDrive:
4. Select device.
1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Disconnect device"
The device remains paired and can be con‐
3. "Mobile devices" nected again, refer to page 69.
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used. Connecting the device
Symbol Function A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via iDrive:
"Telephone"
1. "My Vehicle"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio" 3. "Mobile devices"
"Apps" 4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
69
The functions that were assigned to the device Displaying the installed software
before disconnecting are assigned to the device version
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
The software version installed in the vehicle is
connected, these functions are deactivated.
displayed.
Deleting the device Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Software update"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Show current version"
4. Select device. If an update has been carried out before, select

the desired version to display additional informa‐
5. "Delete device" tion.
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list. Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
Swapping the telephone and hicle is stationary.
additional phone
Via iDrive:
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐
cle, the functions of the phone and additional 1. Store the file for the software update in the
phone can be switched. main directory of a USB flash drive.
Via iDrive: 2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 254.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
5. "Software update"
4. "Settings"
6. "Update software"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
7. "USB"
Software update 8. "Install software"

9. "OK"
General information 10. Wait for the update to complete.
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile 11. "Shut down system"
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3 If necessary, switch off the engine first.
players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is main‐
Restoring the software version
tained up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates. The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
Updates and current information is available at
update can be restored.
www.bmw.com/update.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
70
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. ▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
71
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and Integrated Owner's Manual
options in the vehicle
Concept
It also describes features that are not necessarily The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
options or country versions. This also applies to cle.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
ing these functions and systems, the applicable on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
General information 1. Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
You can use the following media formats to call
up the content in the Owner's Manual: 3. "Owner's Manual"
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 72. 4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 72.
Scrolling through the owner's
manual
Printed Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
Context help
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series. General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
General information the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
Supplementary Owner's Manuals function on the Control Display:
Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary

Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition 1. Press button.
to the onboard literature. 2. "Owner's Manual"
72
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening when a Check Control

2. Press desired programmable mem‐
message is displayed
ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
Executing
"Owner's Manual"
Press the corresponding button.
Changing between a function and The owner's manual is directly dis‐
the Owner's Manual played at the selected entry point.
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to

the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 52, and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
73
74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ....................................................... 102
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 115
Driving ....................................................................................................... 120
Displays ..................................................................................................... 140
Lights ......................................................................................................... 157
Safety ........................................................................................................ 164
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 192
Driver assistance systems ..................................................................... 197
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 233
Climate control ......................................................................................... 234
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 249
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 256
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 260
75
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
It also describes features that are not necessarily this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
options or country versions. This also applies to remote control with you so that the vehicle can
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Remote control For some country versions, unlocking from the

inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
General information
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
is delivered with two remote controls or one re‐ the vehicle from the outside when there are
mote control and the BMW display key, refer to people in it.
page 81.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 79. WARNING
You may set the button functions, depending on Unattended children or animals can cause the
the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐ vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
tings, refer to page 94. traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
The vehicle stores personal settings for every re‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
mote control. Driver profile, refer to page 92.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
dows.
control, refer to page 334.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
control, take the remote control with you when ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
exiting the vehicle. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
76
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview Unlocking the vehicle

If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and

fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the remote control again to unlock the other ve‐
hicle access points.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer
to page 92, are applied.
1 Unlocking
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
2 Locking they were manually switched off. Switch the
3 Opening/closing the tailgate interior lights on/off manually, refer to
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick page 162.
succession: panic mode ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature tion is switched off.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 96, will be switched off.
Unlocking
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
is ready for operation, refer to page 42.
General information
The light functions may depend on the ambient
The behavior of the vehicle when unlocking with
brightness.
the remote control depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 94, for unlocking and lock‐
ing: Convenient opening
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap Press and hold the button on the re‐
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. mote control after unlocking.
▷ If the unlocking of vehicle is confirmed with a The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
light signal or a sound signal. as long as the button on the remote control is
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 158, is pressed.
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked. Locking
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and General information
locked. The behavior of the vehicle during locking with
Exterior mirrors folded in through convenient the remote control depends on the following set‐
closing must be folded open through conven‐ tings, refer to page 94:
ient opening. ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
▷ If the driver's seat is set to the last position a light signal or a sound signal.
saved in the driver's profile. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
▷ If the window is lowered further to make it in and out when the vehicle is locked and un‐
easier to enter. locked.
77
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer Switching on the interior and
to page 158, is activated during locking. exterior lights
Locking the vehicle Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
1. Close the driver's door.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
2. Press the button on the remote control. onds after locking.
The following functions are executed: ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap they were manually switched off. Switch the
are locked. interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 162.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
from being unlocked using the lock buttons ing, refer to page 158, will be switched on.
or the door openers. The light functions may depend on the ambient
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer brightness.
to page 96, will be switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when Tailgate
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be General information
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
With Comfort Access: Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
convenient closing try version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
Safety information page 94.
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure WARNING
that the area of movement of the doors is clear Body parts can be jammed when operating the
during convenient closing. tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle after WARNING
locking. The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
Make sure that the area of movement of the
as long as the button on the remote control is
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
pressed.
78
cover with a lever movement of the

NOTICE integrated key, arrow 2.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
Opening
mote control for approx. 1 second. 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.

4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
Switching on the headlight
5. Press the cover closed.
courtesy delay feature
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
mote control for approx. 1 second.
service center or repair shop or take
Set the duration, refer to page 158. them to a collection point.
Replacing the battery Additional remote controls

1. Remove the integrated key from the remote Additional remote controls are available from a
control, refer to page 85. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ ice center or repair shop.
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
79
Malfunction Switching the drive-ready state on

via emergency detection of the
General information remote control
A Check Control message, refer to page 141, is
displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
tected.
objects.
Proceed as follows in this case:
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects. 1. Hold the remote control with its back against
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ the marked area on the steering column. Pay
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ attention to the display in the instrument
rect proximity to the remote control. cluster.
Do not transport the remote control together 2. If the remote control is detected:
with electronic devices. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ onds.
ing process of mobile devices, for instance If the remote control is not detected, slightly
charging of a mobile phone. change the position of the remote control and re‐
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of peat the procedure.
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a different Frequently asked questions
location. What precautions can be taken to be able to
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐
unlocked and locked from the outside with the mote control?
integrated key, refer to page 84. ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW Connected app include the
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
80
BMW display key

WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
General information vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐ traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
used like the integrated key, refer to page 84. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
The display key supports all functions of the dows.
standard remote control. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
able: There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ Display status of doors and windows. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when
tem. exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel. Overview
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside. 1 Opening/closing the tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
WARNING succession: panic mode
For some country versions, unlocking from the Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
4 Locking
5 Display
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock 6 Back
the vehicle from the outside when there are 7 Switch the display on/off
people in it. 8 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
81
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ To return to the original page: tap on the
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ symbol beneath the display.
ble.
▷ The status information can be called up in the Lower status line
extended reception range. The lower status line indicates whether or not
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐ the display key is within reception range, refer to
ing can be operated. page 81.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car ▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
ventilation can be operated. tion range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
you can display the last transmitted status in‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data
formation from the vehicle. transfer from the vehicle took place.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception Switching on/off
range. The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
Display To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
General information key. Overview, refer to page 81.
The display is divided into the upper status line, To show the display:
the information area, and the lower status line.
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
Upper status line play key.
The upper status line displays the following infor‐ 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
mation: top to unlock the screen lock.
▷ Vehicle secured. To switch off the display to increase the usable

battery life:
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
Information area 3. "OK"
The information area can be used to access in‐ To switch the display on:
formation and perform additional functions. Press the button on the left side of the display
If the information area contains more than one key.
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information. Operating concept
The indicator for the current page has The following information shows how to access
been filled in. the information and functions using the main
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change menus.
between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
82
Main menu Information/Function charged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
"Security /
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
information" Door status. available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
Alarm system status. teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
After alarm triggering: date,
charger used.
time, and reason for triggering
the alarm. ▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
Window status. heat up the tray and the display key.
Glass sunroof status. At higher temperatures, the display key may
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of Con‐ cause a reduction in the charging current,
information" dition Based Service CBS, refer and in isolated cases the charging process
to page 334. may be interrupted temporarily.
Status of the roadside parking ▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
lights. less charging tray, make sure there are no
objects between it and the wireless charging
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel. tray.
"Precondit. With parked-car heating: oper‐
setting" ate parked-car heating, refer to Safety information
page 243.
Without parked-car heating: WARNING
operate parked-car ventilation, When charging a device that meets the Qi
refer to page 243. standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
Display key battery the tray can become very hot. If smart cards,
memory cards or cards with magnetic strips are
General information placed between the device and the tray, this
may impair card function. There is a risk of in‐
Follow the following information:
jury and risk of damage to property. When
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery charging mobile devices, make sure there are
declines, the display is switched off automati‐ no objects between the device and the tray.
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained Charging
until the battery is completely discharged.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours Via USB
before using the display key for the first time Connect the display key via the micro-USB
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐ charging socket to a USB port.
tended period.
▷ The display key can be used during charging
via the USB port. If the battery is fully dis‐
83
With Steptronic transmission: in the Switching on drive-ready state via

wireless charging tray emergency detection of the BMW
display key
1. Open the tray cover.

2. Place the display key into the middle of the It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐ state if the display key has not been detected.
ers. Proceed as follows in this case:
Ensure that the display is facing up.
1. Hold the display key with its back against the
3. Close the tray cover. marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
Malfunction ter.
2. If the display key is detected:
General information
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
A Check Control message is displayed. onds.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may If the display key is not detected, slightly change
malfunction under the following circumstances: the position of the display key and repeat the
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged. procedure.
Charge the battery, refer to page 83.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from Resetting the BMW display key
transmission towers or other equipment with If the charged display key cannot be switched on
high transmitting power. anymore or if the display does not respond to
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐ entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
jects. Press and hold the button on the left side of the
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ display key for at least 20 seconds, until some‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ thing appears on the display.
rect proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
Integrated key
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with General information
metal objects or electronic devices. The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also without remote control using the integrated key.
be unlocked and locked from the outside with The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
the mechanical key. ment.
84
Safety information Locking/unlocking via the door

lock
WARNING 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
For some country versions, unlocking from the one hand.
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTICE
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
The door lock is permanently joined with the
back under the cover and push the cover out.
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be the cover from falling out of the door handle.
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
Removing
3. Remove the cover.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

integrated key, arrow 2.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked

from the inside.
85
Alarm system Unlocking

The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ Press the button.
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the Opening
door lock. ▷ Press the button to unlock all the
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with doors.
the remote control, if necessary through emer‐ Pull the door opener above the armrest.
gency detection of the remote control, refer to
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
page 80.
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
Buttons for the central ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
locking system the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ Comfort Access
tem and interior lights come on.
Concept
Overview The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Buttons for the central locking system. tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
Locking door handle.
Press the button with the front doors ▷ Convenient closing.
closed. ▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
86
Functional requirements Convenient closing

▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the Safety information
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not WARNING
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
Unlocking that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking
Close the driver's door. Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

sunroof will be closed.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
locked doors are not unlocked.
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
87
Safety information Without trailer hitch: touchless

opening and closing of the
WARNING tailgate
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that Concept
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
during opening and closing. touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐
WARNING gate is opened and closed.
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is

General information
Make sure that the area of movement of the To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by
NOTICE an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
windows and heat conductors while driving. The sensor has an approximate range of
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do cle.
not hit the windows. If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Opening Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

WARNING
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
88
Closing
WARNING Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is The hazard warning system flashes and an
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
re-open the tailgate.
NOTICE
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
not hit the windows. charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
Performing the foot movement transmission towers or other equipment with
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ high transmitting power.
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
the vehicle. objects.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction Do not transport the remote control together
of travel and immediately pull it back. With with metal objects.
this movement, the leg must pass through ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
the ranges of both sensors. bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 84.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier. Tailgate
Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning
system flashes. General information
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
close the tailgate.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is also possible to have the doors
89
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to Via iDrive:

page 94.
1. "My Vehicle"
Safety information 2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"
WARNING 4. "Tailgate"
Body parts can be jammed when operating the 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that opening height.
during opening and closing. From the outside
WARNING
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

NOTICE
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also be
Tailgate unlocked. Opening with the remote control, refer
to page 78.
General information If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐
When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ tomatically to the adjusted opening height.
not be opened with the remote control or with
the button in the car's interior. From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Opening Press the button in the driver's door
downward.
Adjusting the opening height
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
must be engaged first.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure that
there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above With manual transmission:
the tailgate.
90
With the vehicle stationary, push the button in

the storage compartment of the driver's door
downwards twice in quick succession.
The tailgate will be opened to the configured

opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations: Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
With Comfort Access:
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐
er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐
ing motion.
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
From the outside The vehicle will be locked after closing the
Press the button on tailgate's exterior. tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be
From the inside outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
gate.
Pull and hold the button in the driver
door.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The remote control must be located in the car's The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
interior for this function. lowing situations:
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
closed.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
From inside the tailgate
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
Without Comfort Access:
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐
ing motion.
91
Malfunction Changes to the settings are automatically stored

in the driver profile currently activated.
Safety information If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
WARNING The new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐ There is an additional guest profile available that
age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage is not assigned to any remote control. It can be
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐ used to apply settings in the vehicle without
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐ changing the personal driver profiles.
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
Manual operation tected remote control must be clearly allocated
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a to the driver.
slow and smooth motion. This is the case when:
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
only. Closing occurs automatically. mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
Driver profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Concept
Active driver profile
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
After switching on the Control Display, the name
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
of the active driver profile is displayed.
when required.
Select driver profile, refer to page 93.
General information As soon as the engine is started or any key is
There are three driver profiles with which per‐ pressed, the last selected display is shown on
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ the Control Display.
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐ To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
signed. "OK"
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control,
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐ Settings
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are
The settings for the following systems and func‐
automatically applied.
tions are stored in the active driver profile. The
If several drivers use their own remote control, scope of storable settings depends on country
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ and equipment.
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if
▷ Unlocking and locking.
the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a
person with a different remote control. ▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
92
▷ Radio. Guest profile

▷ Instrument cluster. The guest profile is for individual settings that are
▷ Programmable memory buttons. stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐
files.
▷ Volumes, tone.
Via iDrive:
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ PDC Park Distance Control. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ Rearview camera. 3. "Drive off (guest)"
▷ Panorama View. 4. "OK"
▷ Head-up Display. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position. Renaming a driver profile
Both the positions saved via the seat memory A personal name can be assigned to the active
and the last position set are saved. driver profile to avoid confusion between the
▷ Intelligent Safety. driver profiles.
Via iDrive:
Profile management
1. "My Vehicle"
Selecting a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles"
Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐ 3. Select driver profile.
ent driver profile may be activated. This allows The driver profile marked with this symbol
you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if can be renamed.
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
4. "Change driver profile name"
mote control.
5. Enter profile name.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles" Resetting a driver profile
3. Select driver profile. The settings of the active driver profile are reset
4. "OK" to their factory settings.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver pro‐ Via iDrive:
file are automatically applied. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the 2. "Driver profiles"
remote control being used at the time.
3. Select driver profile.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐
The driver profile marked with this symbol
ferent remote control, this driver profile will
can be reset.
apply to both remote controls.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
93
Exporting driver profiles ▷ Online.

Most settings of the active driver profile can be 6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving System limits
personal settings, for instance before delivering A clear assignment between the remote control
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐ and driver may not be possible in the following
files can be taken into another vehicle. cases, for example.
Via iDrive: ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or
her own remote control, but another person
1. "My Vehicle"
is driving.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
3. Select driver profile. Access and has multiple remote controls with
The driver profile marked with this symbol him or her.
can be exported. ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
4. "Export driver profile" locked and unlocked.
5. Select a storage device for exporting the ▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside
driver profile. of the vehicle.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 66.
Settings
▷ Online
General information
Via the BMW ConnectedDrive customer
portal. Depending on the package and country version,
various settings are available for the remote con‐
trol functions.
Importing driver profiles
These settings are stored for the driver profile
The existing settings of the active driver profile
currently used.
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
Unlocking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Doors

2. "Driver profiles" Via iDrive:
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. 1. "My Vehicle"
The driver profile marked with this symbol 2. "Vehicle settings"
can be overwritten.
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Import driver profile"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ "Driver's door only"
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
Select USB storage device as needed.
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
94
▷ "All doors" 3. "Doors/Key"

The entire vehicle is unlocked. 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals:
Tailgate ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
try version, this setting may not be offered. ing by one.
Via iDrive: ▷ With alarm system:
1. "My Vehicle" "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
2. "Vehicle settings" Unlocking is signaled by two honks of the
3. "Doors/Key" horn, locking by one.

Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
▷ "Tailgate"
1. "My Vehicle"
The tailgate is opened.
2. "Vehicle settings"
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
3. "Doors/Key"
The tailgate is opened and the doors un‐
locked. 4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
Adjusting the last seat and mirror The vehicle locks automatically after a
position short period of time if no door is opened
Via iDrive: after unlocking.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
2. "Driver profiles" The vehicle locks automatically after you

drive off.
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver Automatic unlocking
profile marked with this symbol.
Via iDrive:
4. "Last seat position automatic"
1. "My Vehicle"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐ 2. "Vehicle settings"
tions. 3. "Doors/Key"
The most recent position is independent of the 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
positions saved via the seat memory. After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
Confirmation signals from the hicle is automatically unlocked.
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
95
Folding mirrors automatically The alarm system signals the following changes
visually and acoustically:
Via iDrive:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
1. "My Vehicle"
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
2. "Vehicle settings" alarm may be suppressed.
3. "Doors/Key" ▷ Visual alarm:
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" By flashing the exterior lighting.
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐
rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐ Switching on/off
tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors.
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
Establishing idle state after the alarm system is switched off and on at the
opening the front doors same time.
Via iDrive:
Opening the doors with the alarm
1. "My Vehicle"
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
3. "Doors/Key" opened if the door was unlocked using the
4. "Turn off after door opening" integrated key in the door lock.
Opening the front doors establishes the idle Switching off the alarm, refer to page 97.
state, refer to page 41.
Opening the tailgate with the
alarm system switched on
Alarm system
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on.
General information
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm tored again provided the doors are locked. The
system reacts to the following changes: hazard warning system flashes once.
▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior. Panic mode
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing self in a dangerous situation.
the vehicle. ▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
▷ Disconnected battery voltage. trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
Diagnosis. three times in succession.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis, refer to page 335.
96
Indicator light on the interior Avoiding unintentional alarms

mirror
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds: ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured. and interior motion sensor
When the still open access points are closed, Press the button on the remote control
interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
will be switched on. locked.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
if needed, through emergency detection of
Tilt alarm sensor
the remote control, refer to page 80.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
The alarm system responds in situations such as remote control on your person, grasp the
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is driver side or front passenger side door han‐
towed. dle completely.
Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
97
Power windows The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
Safety information to page 77.
WARNING Closing
When operating the windows, body parts and ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury The window closes while the switch is
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that being held.
the area of movement of the windows is clear
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
Overview is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 78.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 86.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
Power windows The window opens slightly.
Safety switch Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
The windows can be operated under the follow‐ can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
ing conditions. jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
▷ Standby state is established. movement of the windows.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Closing without the jam protection
system
Opening
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
▷ Press the switch to the resistance prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
point.
The window opens while the switch is being 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
held. and hold it there.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
98
The window closes with limited jam protec‐

tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
Glass sunroof
threshold, closing is interrupted.
General information
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it erated using the same switch.
there.
The window closes without jam protection. Safety information
Safety switch WARNING

Concept
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
The safety switch in the driver's door can be sure that the area of movement of the glass
used to prevent children, for instance from open‐ sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
ing and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the Overview
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Roller sunblinds, rear side

Opening/closing the glass sun‐
windows roof.
WARNING
With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐ Functional requirements
ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be operated under the following conditions.
harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open
▷ Standby state is established.
the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
are closed. ▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook
it onto the bracket.
99
Lifting/closing glass sunroof Opening/closing the glass

Push switch briefly upward. sunroof and sun protection
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts together
and the sun protection opens Briefly press the switch twice in
slightly. succession in the desired direc‐
▷ The opened glass sunroof tion past the resistance point.
closes until it is in the tilted The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
position. The sun protection tection move together. Pressing
does not move. the switch upward stops the motion.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
to page 77.
Opening/closing the glass Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 86.
sunroof and sun protection
separately Comfort position
▷ Press the switch in the desired In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
direction to the resistance terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
point and hold it there. fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
Holding down the switch
this comfort position.
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
fully open, the glass sunroof roof fully.
opens.
The glass sunroof closes Jam protection system
while the switch is being held.
If the glass sunroof is already General information
closed or in the tilted position, If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
the sun protection closes. closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
the resistance point. position, or it is stopped when closing from the
tilted position.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass The glass sunroof opens slightly.
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the Closing from the open position
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted without jam protection
position, the sun protection closes automati‐ If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
cally.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
1. Close all doors.
100
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance Initializing the system
point and hold.
Press the switch up and hold it
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam until initialization is complete.
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
the closing area is clear.
closes again.
Closing from the raised position ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
without jam protection
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
1. Close all doors.

2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power

interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
101
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and
WARNING
options With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
WARNING
Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
the occupants can make a vital contribution to ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. ment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐
mation in the following chapters: Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Seats, refer to page 102.
General information
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 104.
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 106. stored for the driver profile currently used. When
▷ Airbags, refer to page 164. the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the func‐
tion, refer to page 95, is activated for this pur‐
Seats, front pose.
The current seat position can be stored using
Safety information the memory function, refer to page 111.
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
102
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Overview Seat tilt
1 Backrest width Move switch up or down.

2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Backrest tilt Backrest tilt
4 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push

the thigh support forward or back.
Push switch up or down. Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
103
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are

supported for upright posture.
Rear seats
Settings General information

▷ Press the front/rear section of The backrest tilt can be adjusted for the rear
the button: seats. The backrest tilt for the center section is
adjusted together with the left backrest.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Backrest tilt
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar sup‐
port at very high and very low temperatures.
Backrest width Pull the lever and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners. Safety belts
General information Number of safety belts and
You can change the backrest width by adjusting safety belt buckles
the side wings of the backrest.
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
the backrest width temporarily opens fully. fer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
Settings seats are intended for the persons sitting on the
▷ Press the front section of the left and right.
button: The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is
The backrest width de‐ intended for the person sitting in the middle.
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the General information
button: Always make sure that safety belts are being
The backrest width increases. worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
Functional limitations tute for safety belts.
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
104
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will the safety belts checked after an accident at
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build the dealer’s service center or another qualified
if the seat is correctly adjusted. service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
WARNING
your body over your lap and shoulders.
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
safety belt to serve its protective function.
your stomach.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐ ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐ edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐ fragile objects.
ported and secured in designated child ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
restraint systems. ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
WARNING Buckling the safety belt

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts and hip to put it on.
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
stance in the event of an accident or during
audibly.
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle, an
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
way.
position the buckle when not in use.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
modified.
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in ened once after driving away.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, Unbuckling the safety belt
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
105
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
mechanism. ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat Front head restraints
Safety information
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt WARNING
reminder can also be activated if objects are A missing protective effect due to removed or
placed on the front passenger seat. not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
Safety belt reminder for rear
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
seats
restraints on the occupied seats.
General information ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐

ports the back of the head at as close to
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
eye level as possible.
vated each time the engine starts.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
straint is as close as possible to the back
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
ing the trip.
backrest tilt as needed.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ WARNING
minates after the engine is started.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
Symbol Description head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
Green: the safety belt is buckled on moving the head restraint.
the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on

the corresponding rear seat. WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
Safety mode is a risk of injury.
In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
matically. hangers, directly on the head restraint.
If the situation passes without an accident occur‐
ring, the belt tension relaxes.
106
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ Removing

termined to be safe for attachment to a
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
head restraint.
sitting in the seat in question.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐

ance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down. Installing
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
After setting the height, move the head restraint restraint.
up or down slightly, making sure it engages
properly.
Rear head restraints
Adjusting the distance Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
straint toward the rear. ports the back of the head at as close to
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the eye level as possible.
front. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
After setting the distance, move the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back
straint forward or backward slightly, making sure of the head. Adjust the distance via the
it engages properly. backrest tilt as needed.
107

WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There The height of the outer head restraints can be
is a risk of injury. adjusted.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes the head restraint down.
hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ After setting the height, move the head restraint
termined to be safe for attachment to a up or down slightly, making sure it engages
head restraint. properly.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
Folding down the head restraint sitting in the seat in question.
To improve the view to the rear, the head re‐
straints can be folded back. Only fold the head
restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐
sponding seat.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to

page 264, in question.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
fold the head restraint backward. restraint out completely.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the Installing
head restraint engages correctly.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
108
After mounting, slide the head restraint up or Overview

down slightly, making sure the head restraint en‐
gages properly.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more 1 Settings
curved than the driver's side mirror.
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
3 Folding in and out
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via
the remote control, the position is automatically
retrieved if the function, refer to page 95, is acti‐ Adjusting electrically
vated for this purpose.
Press the button.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
The selected mirror moves along with the
using the memory function, refer to page 111.
button movement.
Safety information
Selecting a mirror
WARNING To change over to the other mirror:
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than Slide the switch.
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance Malfunction
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
by looking over your shoulder.
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.
109
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐ Interior mirror, manually
lowing situations: dimmable
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐
Automatic dimming feature ror, flip the lever forward.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior Interior mirror, automatic
mirror, refer to page 110, are used to control
dimming feature
this.
General information
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
mirror
Photocells are used for control:
Concept ▷ In the mirror glass.
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on ▷ On the back of the mirror.
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ Overview
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
is activated, the Automatic Curb Monitor is deac‐
tivated.
Deactivating ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Slide the switch to the passenger's side ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror position. mirror and the windshield.
110
Steering wheel Switching on/off

Press the button.
Safety information A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes

WARNING after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can wheel activates automatically if the function was
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. switched on at the end of the last trip.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is stationary only. Memory function
Concept
Manual steering wheel
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
adjustment essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 92.
1. Fold the lever down. The following settings are not stored:
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred ▷ Backrest width.
height and angle to suit your seating position. ▷ Lumbar support.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Safety information
Heated steering wheel
WARNING
Overview
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Heated steering wheel
111
Seat heating
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
Overview
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ Front
ment.
Overview
Seat heating
Rear
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Storing
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button. The writing on the but‐

ton lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. A signal sounds. Seat heating
Calling up settings
Switching on
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press the button once for each temper‐
Press selected button 1 or 2.
ature level.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
The maximum temperature is reached when
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
three LEDs are lit.
tons is pressed again.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 280,
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the heater output is reduced.
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
112
Switching off Active seat ventilation
Press and hold the button until the bar

display on the climate control display
Switching on
goes out.
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
Seat heating distribution
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
The heating action in the seat cushion and the lit.
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways. The ventilation switches back by one level after a
Via iDrive: short time.
1. "My Vehicle" Switching off

Press and hold the button until the bar
3. "Climate functions" display on the climate control display
4. Select a menu item: goes out.
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control" Individual activation
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
5. Select the desired seat, if needed.
Concept
A number of heating and cooling functions can
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
be automatically activated depending on the ex‐
heating distribution.
ternal temperature.
Active seat ventilation General information

The external temperature at which the functions
are to be automatically activated can be set via
Concept
iDrive.
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
Activation is performed if the external tempera‐
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first 2 minutes after drive-ready state has
Overview been switched on. A new alignment is carried out
after the settings have been changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically activated:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Heated steering wheel.
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐
cally with the levels that were last selected.
113
The safety belt of the corresponding seat is
buckled.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Climate functions"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Select the menu item of the desired function.
7. Set the external temperature at which the
function is to be activated.
8. Set the desired level.
114
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
options in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
cific and optional features offered with the series. as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
It also describes features that are not necessarily no longer be used due to their age, weight and
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected size.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
The right place for children children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
Safety information
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
WARNING belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
Unattended children or animals can cause the the event of an accident or during braking and
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
traffic, for instance due to the following actions: danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Children on the front passenger
dows. seat
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat
passenger airbags, refer to page 166.
Always transport children in the

rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
115
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Safety information sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
WARNING rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. straints or remove them.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Installing child restraint
WARNING
systems
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
General information bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
ating and safety information of the child restraint bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
system manufacturer when selecting, installing, GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
and using child restraint systems.
After installing a child restraint system in the
Safety information front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
WARNING
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
The protective effect of damaged child restraint tomatically, refer to page 166.
systems or of child restraint systems exposed
to an accident and their fastening systems can
Seat position and height
be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐
ciently restrained, for instance in the event of Before installing a child restraint system, move
an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers. the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐ This seat position and height ensures the best
straint systems exposed to an accident and possible position for the belt and offers optimal
their fastening systems checked and possibly protection in the event of an accident.
replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐ If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
other qualified service center or repair shop. front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
best possible belt guide position is reached.
WARNING
Backrest width
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
ment or improper installation of the child seat. child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make open the backrest width completely. Do not
116
change the backrest width again and do not call Mounts for the lower LATCH
up a memory position. anchors
Child seat security General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐ If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
ten child restraint systems. the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
Locking the safety belt curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
1. Pull out the belt strap completely. straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it Position
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked. Symbol Meaning
Unlocking the safety belt The corresponding symbol

shows the mounts for the lower
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
LATCH anchors.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ chors are marked with a pair, 2,
pletely. of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
LATCH child restraint fixing
It is not recommended to use
system the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH positions
General information to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
hicle safety belt instead for the
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ middle seat.
ating and safety information of the LATCH child
restraint fixing system manufacturer when se‐
lecting, installing, and using child restraint sys‐
tems.
117
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Before installing LATCH child child restraint systems to the upper retaining
restraint fixing systems straps.
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the

child restraint system. Anchors
The respective symbol shows the
Assembly of LATCH child
anchor for the upper retaining
restraint fixing systems strap. Seats with an upper top
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ tether are marked with this sym‐
er's information. bol. It can be found on the rear
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
erly connected.
Routing the retaining strap
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not 1 Direction of travel
guided across sharp edges and without twist‐ 2 Head restraint
ing to the upper retaining strap.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
WARNING 5 Seat backrest
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective 6 Upper retaining strap
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In particular situations, for in‐ Attaching the upper retaining strap
stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐ to the anchor
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports or along both sides of the head re‐
straint to the anchor.
NOTICE 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
backrest and the cargo cover.
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
these retaining straps. When other objects are anchor.
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
118
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they cannot

be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to
page 99.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
options
WARNING
It also describes features that are not necessarily An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
options or country versions. This also applies to Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ing.
ing these functions and systems, the applicable In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
laws and regulations must be observed. against rolling away, follow the following:
Start/Stop button ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

curb.
Concept ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
Pressing the Start/Stop button also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
switches drive-ready state on or wheel chock.
off, refer to page 41.
Steptronic transmission: the
drive-ready state is switched on NOTICE
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐ In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
ing the Start/Stop button. peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐ lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
fer to page 41, is switched back on. damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Drive-ready state Switching on drive-ready state
Safety information Steptronic transmission

1. Depress the brake pedal.
DANGER 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
120
Driving CONTROLS
Diesel engine Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to

If the engine is cold and temperatures are below page 137, the system is automatically activated
approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be de‐ or deactivated.
layed somewhat due to automatic preheating.
Engine stop
A Check Control message with yellow in‐
dicator light is displayed.
Gasoline engine Steptronic transmission

Depending on the motorization, the full drive The engine is switched off automatically during a
power may not be available for approximately stop under the following conditions:
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual. D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
Display in the instrument cluster vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐ Automatic Hold.
ometer shows the current engine speed. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission: manual
Steptronic transmission engine stop
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ If the engine was not switched off automatically
hicle stopped. when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
2. Press the Start/Stop button. switched off manually:
The engine is switched off. ▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
3. Set the parking brake. the current pedal position.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐
Auto Start/Stop function gine switches off.
Concept Air conditioner when the engine is

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. switched off
The system switches off the engine during a The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic when the engine is switched off.
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off. Displays in the instrument cluster
General information General information

After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐ The display in the tachometer in‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The dicates that the Auto Start/Stop
function is activated from speeds of approx. function is ready for an Automatic
3 mph/5 km/h. engine start.
121
CONTROLS Driving
The display indicates that the ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐
conditions for an automatic en‐ tion in N or R.
gine stop have not been met. ▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Total time with switched-off engine Starting the engine

ECO PRO, refer to page 280,
driving mode: depending on the
vehicle equipment, the total time
Steptronic transmission
that the engine has been
switched off using the Auto Start/ The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐ ing preconditions:
gine stop. ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
The total time is automatically reset every time ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
the vehicle is refueled. accelerator pedal.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
Safety mode
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough. not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ lowing conditions are met:
matic climate control is running. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or driver's door is open.
cooled to the required level. ▷ The hood was unlocked.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
when the automatic climate control is of time.
switched on.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐ button.
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required. System limits
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐ Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
ing wheel is being turned. vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. lowing situations:
▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
the heating is switched on.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
122
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation Using the button

when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
Press the button.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Steptronic transmission: via
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop selector lever position
function The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ in selector lever position M/S.
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Via the Driving Dynamics Control
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐ The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics
proactive manner. Control.
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
tions: Display
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
time is expected to be very short, the engine deactivated.
is not switched off automatically. A message
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
appears on the Control Display, depending
tivated.
on the situation.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle Switching off the vehicle during an
needs to drive off immediately, the engine is automatic engine stop
started automatically.
The function may be restricted if the navigation General information
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
ample. be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
Activating/deactivating the
system manually Steptronic transmission
Concept ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
The engine is started during an automatic engine
stop.
123
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐

matically. WARNING
2. Set the parking brake. Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
Automatic deactivation traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, dows.
for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
off the engine automatically. A Check Control leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
message is displayed. It is possible to continue hicle. Take the remote control with you when
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s exiting and lock the vehicle.
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Overview
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Parking brake
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Setting
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing. With a stationary vehicle
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
Pull the switch.
against rolling away, follow the following:
The LED lights up.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
turn the front wheels in the direction of the ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
curb. set.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
While driving
wheel chock.
To use as emergency brake while driving:
124
Driving CONTROLS
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
hard while the switch is being pulled. is stationary.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and using the parking brake.
the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed. Display
The indicator light changes from green
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐ to red.
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing Safety information
Releasing manually WARNING

1. Switch on drive-ready state. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
2. Steptronic transmission: press the Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
switch while the brake is pressed or selector ing.
lever position P is set.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
The LED and indicator light go out. against rolling away, follow the following:
The parking brake is released. ▷ Set the parking brake.
Automatic release turn the front wheels in the direction of the
The parking brake is released automatically curb.
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator light go out. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Automatic Hold
Concept WARNING
This system assists the driver by automatically Unattended children or animals can cause the
setting and releasing the brake, such as when vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
moving in stop-and-go traffic. traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
is stationary. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
from rolling backward when driving off. dows.
General information
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Under the following conditions, the parking brake
is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
125
CONTROLS Driving
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when tomatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
NOTICE
Driving off
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic cator light is no longer illuminated.
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
Overview
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the

drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Automatic Hold vated.
Switching function readiness off

Establishing function readiness of Press the button.
Automatic Hold
The LED goes out.
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
The indicator light goes out.
2. Press button.
The LED lights up.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
The indicator light lights up green.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
Automatic Hold is functional. press additionally on the brake pedal, when
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐ switching off.
lected setting is active.
Malfunction
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
Function readiness is established and the driv‐ parking brake:
er's door is closed.
126
Driving CONTROLS
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ Triple turn signal activation
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐ Lightly tap the lever up or down.
hicle.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
After a power failure Via iDrive:
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a 1. "My Vehicle"
power failure: 2. "Vehicle settings"
1. Switch on standby state. 3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
5. "One-touch turn signal"
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set
and then push. 6. Select the desired setting.
This process may take a few seconds. Any The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
sounds associated with this are normal. rently used.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐

Signaling briefly
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlight flasher

headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror

When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals ▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
127
CONTROLS Driving
Washer/wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
General information resume at their previous speed.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them Switching off and brief wipe
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the Press the lever down.
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
ers are folded in when switching on.
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
NOTICE
The lever automatically returns to its initial
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the position when released.
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
Rain sensor
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
Switching on between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE
Press the lever up until the desired position is If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
reached. accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
▷ Rain sensor, position 1. vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
128
Driving CONTROLS
Activating Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started. NOTICE
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐ wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
tion is deactivated. a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Cleaning the windshield
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rains sensor sensitivity. Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
129
CONTROLS Driving
Rear window wiper Safety information
Overview WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
Switching on
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
Turn the outer switch upward. wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ shield prior to switching the wipers on.
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window Folding away the wipers

1. Switch on standby state.
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
its idle position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
its interval position when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
130
Driving CONTROLS
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
windshield. materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
Folding down the wipers WARNING

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
system must be reactivated. tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
shield. washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
ervoir.
the wiper lever down again.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
Washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
General information add silicon-containing additives to the washer
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ fluid.
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield NOTICE
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
used. trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
Recommended minimum fill quantity: system. There is a risk of damage to property.
0.2 US gal/1 liter. Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
Safety information mixing ratios provided on the containers.
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
131
CONTROLS Driving
Overview ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

wheel chock.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment. Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Malfunction vehicle is stationary.
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
Neutral N
correct readings at temperatures below The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
+5 ℉/-15 ℃. for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 133, in selector lever position N.
Steptronic transmission Parking position P

Selector lever position, for instance for parking
Concept the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ Engage selector lever position P only when the
sibility of manual shifting, if needed. vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
Safety information cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
WARNING selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
ing. is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured gaged.
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
▷ Set the parking brake. when selector lever position N is engaged.
curb.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever selector lever automatically returns to the

positions center position when released.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position P
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D,

N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
Press button P.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ General information
lector lever lock.
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ to page 125.
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The 4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
133
CONTROLS Driving
In this way, standby state remains switched Activating the sport program
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever lever position D.
position P is automatically engaged after approx. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
35 minutes. cluster, for instance S1.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
change the selector lever position. vated.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 136. Ending the Sport program
Kickdown
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Manual mode M/S
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Sport program M/S
Activating manual mode
Concept
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
The shifting points and shifting times in the
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
134
Driving CONTROLS
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument Short-term manual mode

cluster, for instance M1. In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
Shifting After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
ward. for a certain amount of time, the transmission
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. switches back to automatic mode.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐ It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
cally in certain situations, for instance when follows:
speed limits are reached. ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
Steptronic Sport transmission: dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode Continuous manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 138, is se‐ In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does dle switches into manual mode permanently.
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached. Steptronic Sport transmission
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration, With the appropriate transmission version, the
this function is active independently of the driv‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
ing mode. neously activating kickdown and operating the
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
down. term manual mode.
Ending the manual mode Shifting

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
General information ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
Shifting pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
road speeds. strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Displays in the instrument 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.

cluster 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P. For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 348.
Launch Control
Electronic unlocking of the Concept

transmission lock Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
General information rounding conditions.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. General information
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the The use of Launch Control causes premature
engine. component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
away. refer to page 270, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
Engaging selector lever position N with Launch Control.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button Launch Control is available when the engine is at
pressed. operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
least 6 miles/10 km.
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
Start with launch control
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
A Check Control message is displayed.
2. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. position, kickdown.
136
Driving CONTROLS
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument Overview

cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
Displays in the instrument
After using Launch Control cluster
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ The selected driving mode is dis‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible. played in the instrument cluster.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Driving modes
Button Driving Configuration

Driving Dynamics Control mode
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept SPORT
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the PLUS
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situa‐ COMFORT
tion using various driving modes. ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE
General information
The following systems are affected, for instance:
▷ Engine characteristics.
Driving modes in detail
▷ Steptronic transmission. COMFORT
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Steering. Concept
▷ Adaptive M chassis. Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient
driving.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control. Switching on
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cally.
cluster.
137
CONTROLS Driving
SPORT ECO PRO
Concept Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐ Efficient driving setting.
mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
Press the button repeatedly until PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
SPORT is displayed in the instrument ter.
cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Concept Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Configuration Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control" 4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL" 5. Select the desired setting.
5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
rently used. Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ settings:
tings: "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
SPORT PLUS
Concept
Concept Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐ automatically modified to the driving situation
justed drive. and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
Switching on sections are considered.
Press the button repeatedly until The function may be restricted if the navigation
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐ data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ment cluster. ample.
138
Driving CONTROLS
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving mode
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
ing mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the

driving mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Variable displays
options Service requirements 146

4 Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tachometer 145
cific and optional features offered with the series. Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
It also describes features that are not necessarily ECO PRO displays 280
5 Engine temperature 145
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ 6 Navigation display
ing these functions and systems, the applicable Transmission display
laws and regulations must be observed. Status, Driving Dynamics Control 137
7 Check Control 141
Instrument cluster Onboard Computer 150
8 Variable displays
General information Speed Limit Info 148
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐
possible to deactivate the display change in the tures:
instrument cluster via iDrive. Range 146
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster 9 Reset miles 151
may differ from the illustrations in this Owner's
Manual.
Instrument cluster with
Overview enhanced features: setting the
operating mode
Concept
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster can be set to three different operating
modes in addition to the driving mode.
Settings
Via iDrive:
1 Fuel gage 145
1. "My Vehicle"
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
range 146
3. "Displays"
2 Speedometer
4. "Instrument panel"
3 Time 146
External temperature 146
140
Displays CONTROLS
▷ "STANDARD": all displays on the instru‐ General information

ment cluster are active.
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
▷ "REDUCED" all displays on the instru‐ bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
ment cluster are reduced to the essential. text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays on the instru‐ applicable, in the Head-up Display.
ment cluster are active. Individual displays In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an
can be individually selected. SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Configuring INDIVIDUAL
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving Indicator/warning lights
mode is switched into ECO PRO or SPORT,
the instrument cluster automatically switches Concept
into the respective view. Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed recog‐ display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
nized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded, the cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in
exceeded range is marked red in the speed‐ the monitored systems.
ometer.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features: General information
"Magnifier function": the current speed is The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
shown enlarged in the speedometer. ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
Instrument cluster without tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
enhanced features: selecting state is switched on.
displays in the instrument
cluster Red lights
Via iDrive: Safety belt reminder
1. "My Vehicle" Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
2. "iDrive settings" safety belt on the driver or passenger
3. "Displays" side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
4. "Instrument panel" on the front passenger seat.
5. Select desired setting: Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
▷ "Road signs": display Speed Limit Info. correctly.
Check Control Safety belt reminder for rear seats

The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
responding rear seat.
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
141
CONTROLS Displays
Airbag system DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Airbag system and belt tensioner are not
Control is activated
working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified DSC, refer to page 192, and DTC, refer
service center or repair shop. to page 194.
Parking brake Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The parking brake is set. The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Release the parking brake, refer to tire inflation pressure in a tire.
page 125. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Brake system Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 317.
Braking system impaired. Continue to

drive moderately. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Have the vehicle checked immediately The indicator light lights up: the Tire
by a dealer’s service center or another Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
qualified service center or repair shop. tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
Yellow lights The indicator light flashes and then continuously

lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
Anti-lock Braking System ABS sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
Braking force boost may not be working.
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
braking distance into account.
matically becomes active again.
Have the system immediately checked
▷ In the case of tires with special approval:
by a dealer’s service center or another
TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
DSC Dynamic Stability Control mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls ice center or another qualified service center
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle or repair shop as needed.
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
your driving style to the driving circumstances. dealer’s service center or another qualified
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ service center or repair shop.
tioned. Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 310.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 192.
142
Displays CONTROLS
Steering system Parking light/low beams, automatic headlight

control, refer to page 157.
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv‐ Lane departure warning
ice center or repair shop. The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated. At least one lane marking
Emissions was detected and warnings can be is‐
sued.
▷ The warning light lights up:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 178.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Front fog lights
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances: Front fog lights are switched on.
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring Front fog lights, refer to page 161.
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ High-beam Assistant
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components, High beams are switched on and off au‐
in particular the catalytic converter. tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to High-beam Assistant, refer to page 160.
page 335.
Green lights Automatic Hold

Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
Safety belt reminder for rear seats is automatically held in place when it is
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ stationary.
sponding rear seat. Automatic Hold, refer to page 125.
Turn signal Blue lights

Turn signal switched on.
High beams
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has High beams are switched on.
failed. High beams, refer to page 127.
Turn signal, refer to page 127.
Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched
on.
143
CONTROLS Displays
Hiding Check Control messages Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Press and hold the button on the turn signal Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
lever. tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Continuous display
Additional information, such as the reason for an
Some Check Control messages are displayed error or malfunction or the required action, can
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ be called up via Check Control.
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
utively.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
ther help can be selected.
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Temporary display
2. "Vehicle status"
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ 4. "Check Control"
played again later. 5. Select the desired text message.
Displaying stored Check Control ▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
messages Contact BMW Group Accident Assis‐
Via iDrive: tance.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Service request"
2. "Vehicle status" Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
3. Move the Controller to the left. other qualified service center or repair
shop.
4. "Check Control"
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
5. Select the SMS text message.
Contact Roadside Assistance.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
144
Displays CONTROLS
Display additional information about the

Check Control message in the Integrated
Tachometer
Owner's Manual.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
Messages after trip completion protect the engine.
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off. Standby state and drive-
ready state
Fuel gage The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready state
Concept is switched off and standby state
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. is switched on.
General information The letters READY in the tach‐

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to ometer indicate that the Auto
vary. Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
Information on refueling, refer to page 288.
Instrument cluster without For further information, see Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
enhanced features: display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the Engine temperature
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
Instrument cluster with the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
enhanced features: display
vehicle speeds.
An arrow beside the fuel pump ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
symbol shows which side of the ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. dle or in the lower half of the
The current range is displayed as temperature display.
numerical value. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Indicator light In the instrument Control message is displayed.
cluster Check the coolant level, refer to page 332.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,

once the fuel reserve is reached.
145
CONTROLS Displays
Indicator light In the instrument With a low remaining range, a Check Control
cluster message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, for instance taking curves aggres‐
A red indicator light is displayed. sively, the engine function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
External temperature Safety information
General information NOTICE

If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a With a driving range of less than
signal sounds. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
A Check Control message is displayed. sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Safety information
Instrument cluster without
WARNING enhanced features: display
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ The current range is displayed as
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on numerical value at the bottom of
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a the speedometer.
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Instrument cluster with

Time enhanced features: display
The current range is displayed as
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster. numerical value next to the fuel
Setting the time and time format, refer to gage.
page 59.
Range
Service requirements
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still be Concept
covered with the current fuel level. The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
The estimated range available with the remaining General information
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
cluster. ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
146
Displays CONTROLS
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Via iDrive:

nance.
1. "My Vehicle"
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
2. "Vehicle status"
ice requirements from your remote control.
Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key. 4. "Service required"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
Display 6. "Date:"
Detailed information on service
requirements Automatic Service Request
More information on the type of service required
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
may be displayed on the Control Display.
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
Via iDrive: mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
1. "My Vehicle" vehicle is due for service.
2. "Vehicle status" You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
Via iDrive:
4. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
gally mandated inspections are displayed. 2. "Vehicle status"
5. Select an entry to call up detailed information. 3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"
Symbols
Sym‐ Description Gear shift indicator

bols
No service is currently required. Concept

The system recommends the most efficient gear
for the current driving situation.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ General information
tion is approaching.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
The service deadline has already try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the
passed. manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and
with manual transmission.
Entering appointment dates Steptronic transmission:

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ displaying
spections.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are played in the instrument cluster.
set correctly.
147
CONTROLS Displays
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ Overview

gaged gear is displayed.
Example Description Camera
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Speed Limit Info Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current valid maxi‐ Displaying Speed Limit Info
mum speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐ Limit Info is displayed via the operating mode of
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well the instrument cluster or via iDrive.
as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered Display via operating mode of the
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data. instrument cluster
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or hid‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
den via the operating mode of the instrument
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
cluster.
The system takes into account the information
The Speed Limit Info is displayed in the following
stored in the navigation system and also displays
operating modes: "STANDARD" or
speed limits present on routes without signs.
"INDIVIDUAL"
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not shown.
Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the following
operating mode: "REDUCED"
Safety information
Adjusting the operating mode of the instrument
cluster, refer to page 140.
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Display via iDrive
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility 1. "My Vehicle"
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene 3. "Displays"
where appropriate.
148
Displays CONTROLS
4. "Instrument panel" ▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
5. "Road signs" and the day of the week.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
Display tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
General information as due to changes in road routing.
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument ▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-up Display. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
Speed Limit Info ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
Current speed limit. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
road configurations.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
Speed Limit Info not available.
after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
System limits General information

The system may not be fully functional and may Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ lowing can be displayed or operated using the
uations: buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel as well as the displays in the instrument
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
▷ Current audio source.
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect.
149
CONTROLS Displays
Activating a list and adjusting Calling up information

the setting
Press and hold the button on the turn signal

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the lever.
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Pressing the button repeatedly displays addi‐
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired tional information.
setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Information at a glance
Display The following information can be displayed on
the Onboard Computer:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Navigation data.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
▷ Consumption display.
▷ Average consumption and average speed.
▷ Compass display for the driving direction.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ Adjusting information for
tration. Onboard Computer
For some information of the Onboard Computer,
it is possible to set whether it can be called up in
Onboard Computer in the the instrument cluster.
instrument cluster Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept 2. "iDrive settings"
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ 3. "Displays"
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐ 4. "Instrument panel"
age values.
5. "Onboard info"
150
Displays CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Display

rently used.
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying/resetting miles
▷ Press the knob to display the
trip miles.
When the drive-ready state is ▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.
switched off, miles and trip ▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
miles are displayed.
▷ Keep the knob pressed down to reset the trip
Consumption display
miles.
Concept
Display During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy during
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be reduced.
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
General information
▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Energy recovery and current consumption can
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. be displayed as bar displays in the Onboard
Computer.
Navigation data Display
General information
The estimated time of arrival and the distance re‐
maining to the destination are displayed if a des‐
tination is entered in the navigation system be‐
fore the trip is started.
▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.

▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
151
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Current consumption, arrow 3.

Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Average speed and average
consumption
Concept
General information The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
Average speed and average consumption are cle data on the Control Display, such as average
calculated for the distance traveled since the last values.
reset in the Onboard Computer.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
General information
engine manually stopped are not included in the Two types of Onboard Computers are available
calculation of the average speed. on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
Resetting average values consumption, are displayed. The values can
be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset as
often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard

Computer or trip computer
Via iDrive:
Press and hold the button on the turn signal 1. "My Vehicle"
lever. 2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Display
Resetting the Onboard
Computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
▷ Average speed, arrow 1.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2. Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
152
Displays CONTROLS
3. "Trip computer" 4. "Warning at:"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
▷ "Reset": all values are reset. displayed.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset 6. Press the Controller.
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
come to a standstill. Activating/deactivating the
5. If necessary, "OK" speed warning
Via iDrive:
Sport displays 1. "My Vehicle"

General information 3. "Speed warning"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current 4. "Speed warning"
values for performance and torque can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Displays Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "Speed warning"
3. "Sport displays" 4. "Select current speed"
Speed warning Vehicle status

Concept General information
A speed limit can be set that when reached will The status can be displayed and actions per‐
cause a warning to be issued. formed for several systems.
General information Opening the vehicle status

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ Via iDrive:
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Configuring the speed limit
warning Information at a glance
Via iDrive: ▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat Tire
Monitor, refer to page 317.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
2. "Vehicle settings" Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 310.
3. "Speed warning"
153
CONTROLS Displays
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil 3. "Displays"

level check, refer to page 328. 4. "Head-Up Display"
▷ "Diesel exhaust fluid": BMW Advanced 5. "Head-Up Display"
Diesel, refer to page 292.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐ Display
sages are stored in the background and can
be displayed on the Control Display. Display‐ Overview
ing stored Check Control messages, refer to
The following information is displayed on the
page 144.
Head-up Display:
▷ "Service required": Displaying service
▷ Speed.
requirements, refer to page 146.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
Head-up Display ▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
Concept as needed.
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. Selecting the view
The driver can get information without averting Various views are available for the Head-up Dis‐
his or her eyes from the road. play.
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "My Vehicle"
Read the information for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 355. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
Overview 4. "Head-Up Display"
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-up
Display are active.
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-up
Display are reduced to the minimum.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-up
Display are active. Individual displays
such as Check Control messages can be
selected individually.
Switching on/off The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
154
Displays CONTROLS
Selecting displays in the Head-up 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
Display reached.
Via iDrive: 7. Press the Controller.
1. "My Vehicle"
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
3. "Displays" stored using the memory function, refer to
4. "Head-Up Display" page 111.
5. "INDIVIDUAL"
Setting the rotation
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
rently used. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
3. "Displays"
ambient brightness.
4. "Head-Up Display"
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
5. "Rotation"
Via iDrive:
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
1. "My Vehicle" selected.
2. "iDrive settings" 7. Press the Controller.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display" Visibility of the display
5. "Brightness" The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. ▷ Seat position.
7. Press the Controller. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
When the low beams are switched on, the ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ ▷ Wet roads.
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Via iDrive: qualified service center or repair shop.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Special windshield
3. "Displays" The windshield is part of the system.
4. "Head-Up Display" The shape of the windshield makes it possible to

display a precise image.
5. "Height"
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
155
CONTROLS Displays
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have

the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
or repair shop, if necessary.
156
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
cific and optional features offered with the series. Low beams.
options or country versions. This also applies to Instrument lighting.
laws and regulations must be observed. Right roadside parking light.
Overview Left roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle
Parking lights, low beams

and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
The light switch element is located next to the automatically switched off.
steering wheel.
Parking lights
Symbol Function Position of switch:
Front fog lights. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
Lights off. it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
Daytime running lights. ready state.
Parking lights. Low beams

Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
157
CONTROLS Lights
Roadside parking lights LED light carpet

When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
parking light can be switched on.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
The light source is located in the position indi‐

Welcome lights and cated.
headlight courtesy delay Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
feature
Headlight courtesy delay feature
Welcome lights
General information
General information The low beams stay lit for a particular time if the
high beams are switched on after standby state
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
is switched on.
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
Setting the duration

Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
Position of switch: ,
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
3. "Lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
▷ "Welcome lights"
Individual light functions are switched on Automatic headlight
for a limited time. control
▷ "LED light carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illuminated Concept
for a limited time.
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
158
Lights CONTROLS
General information Adaptive light functions

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
Activating
tion of the roadway.
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐ General information
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
The adaptive light functions may consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
System limits equipment version:
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as ▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 159.
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 159.
ing conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
Activating
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
the light on manually. Position of switch:
The adaptive light functions are active when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Daytime running lights
Adaptive Light Control
General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
Position of switch: , , rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
course of the road.
The daytime running lights light up when drive-
ready state is switched on. After drive-ready To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
state is switched off, the parking lights light up in Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
position . lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Activating/deactivating Cornering light

In some countries, daytime running lights are In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
vate the daytime running lights. light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
Via iDrive:
certain speed.
1. "My Vehicle" The cornering light is automatically switched on
2. "Vehicle settings" depending on the steering angle or the use of
3. "Lighting" turn signals.
4. "Exterior lighting" When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may

be automatically switched on regardless of the
5. "Daytime running lamps" steering angle.
rently used.
159
CONTROLS Lights
Adaptive headlight range The indicator light in the instrument clus‐

ter is illuminated when the low beams are
control switched on.
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐ The headlights are automatically switched be‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in tween low beams and high beams.
order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to The blue indicator light in the instrument
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway. cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
High-beam Assistant The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when

manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 127.
Concept
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
button on the turn signal lever.
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation. Sensitivity of the high-beam
Assistant
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
General information
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐ The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high be adjusted.
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming Safety information
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. WARNING
The high beams can be switched on and off If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
manually at any time. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of an acci‐
Activating/deactivating dent. If adjustments have been made and the
sensitivity has been modified, make sure that
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
Adjusting the sensitivity

Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
Position of switch:
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
160
Lights CONTROLS
Resetting the sensitivity Switching on/off

Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐ Press the button.
onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
The green indicator light lights up if the
is reset to the factory settings.
front fog lights are switched on.
System limits If the automatic headlight control is activated, the

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ low beams will come on automatically when you
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when switch on the front fog lights.
to use the high beams. In situation that require When the high beams or headlight flasher are
this, therefore switch off manually. activated, the front fog lights are not switched
The system is not fully functional in the following on.
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
Instrument lighting
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and The parking lights or low beams must be
wagons; when driving close to train or ship switched on to adjust the brightness.
traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, Settings
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming Adjust the brightness with the
traffic on highways. thumbwheel.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Interior lights
Fog lights General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
Front fog lights lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
Concept trolled.
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
161
CONTROLS Lights
Overview Switching on/off

The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
Buttons in the vehicle cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
Interior lights 4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Reading lights The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Switching the interior lights Selecting color scheme

on/off Via iDrive:
Press the button. 1. "My Vehicle"
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds. 3. "Lighting"
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can 4. "Interior lighting"
be switched on and off independently. The but‐ 5. "Color"
ton is located in the rear roofliner. 6. Select the desired setting.
Switching the reading lights Setting the brightness

on/off Via iDrive:
Press the button. 1. "My Vehicle"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
3. "Lighting"
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear. 4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
Ambient light 6. Select the desired setting.
General information Dimmed while driving

Depending on the equipment version, lighting Via iDrive:
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior. 1. "My Vehicle"
162
Lights CONTROLS
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Dimmed for night driving"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
163
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts side of the body in the chest and lap area.
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
164
Safety CONTROLS
Ejection Mitigation ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐

The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the son.
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ senger side must stay clear - do not attach
pact events. adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
Knee airbag devices or mobile phones.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐ ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
pact. cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Protective effect ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
General information ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ other objects to the front passenger seat that
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear- are not specifically suited for seats with
end collisions. integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests.
airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
WARNING
dashboard, and the seats.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
timum protective effect of the airbag system. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Customer Relations for further information.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the Warnings and information on the airbags are also
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as found on the sun visors.
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
165
CONTROLS Safety
Functional readiness of the Automatic deactivation of the

airbag system front-seat passenger airbags
Safety information Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is
WARNING occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
jury. Do not touch individual components. senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
WARNING Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
structions for children on the front passenger
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
seat, see Children.
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
Safety information
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by WARNING
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
service center or repair shop.
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
When drive-ready state is switched on, or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
the warning light in the instrument clus‐ senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners. Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
Malfunction When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
▷ Warning light does not come on in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
when drive-ready state is switched cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
on. lights up.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously. In this case, change the sitting position so that
Have the system checked. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
166
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or restraint system has been detected and the
other items to the front passenger seat un‐ front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat. Strength of the driver's and
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front-seat passenger airbag
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
tem is to be installed on it. seat passenger airbags very much depends on
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
could press against the seat from below. To maintain the accuracy of this function over
▷ No moisture in or on the seat. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Indicator light for the front-seat Display.
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger Calibrating the front seats
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag. WARNING
The light indicates whether the airbags are either There is a risk of jamming when moving the
activated or deactivated. seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
airbags are either activated or deactivated. ment.
▷ The indicator light lights up
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
when a child is properly
trol Display.
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is 1. Press the switch and move the respective
empty. The airbags on the seat all the way forward, until it stops.
front passenger side are not
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
activated.
moves forward slightly.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ The calibration procedure is completed when the
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ message on the Control Display disappears.
vated. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
Detected child restraint systems If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
The system generally detects children seated in
possible.
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
167
CONTROLS Safety
Intelligent Safety
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
Concept malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
driver assistance system. risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems Overview
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
Button in the vehicle
▷ Approach control warning with light braking
function, refer to page 169.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 173.
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 175.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 178.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 181.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 185.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
WARNING
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene Button Status
where appropriate.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
WARNING Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ gent Safety systems are switched off
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due or currently unavailable.
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ Button does not light up: all Intelligent
ings or reactions or these might be output late, Safety systems are switched off.
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
Press the button:
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate. The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
168
Safety CONTROLS
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, Intersection warning when equipped with a radar
all systems are now switched on. sensor: in addition, a warning is issued at inter‐
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the sections and junctions if a risk of collision with
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ crossing traffic is detected.
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ The approach control warning is available even if
ual settings are activated and stored for the cruise control has been deactivated.
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu tentionally, the approach control warning and
are activated. braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between: The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the may vary with the current driving situation.
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
Detection range
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Objects that the system can detect are taken

Approach control warning into account.
with light braking function Intersection warning: the system is also able to
detect vehicles crossing your direction of travel
when these vehicles enter into the detection
Concept
range of the system.
The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐
cident cannot be prevented, the system will help
reduce the impact speed. Safety information
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐ WARNING
ently, if needed.
General information and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
tem is controlled by the following sensors: Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. where appropriate.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
169
CONTROLS Safety
Camera
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
tervene where appropriate.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
WARNING
clean and clear.
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a With radar sensor
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
Overview
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of

the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Intelligent Safety
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.

Press the button.
The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
170
Safety CONTROLS
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the Warning with braking function

equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ Display
ual settings are activated and stored for the
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
are activated.
Symbol Measure
Press the button repeatedly.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween: Brake and increase distance.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the signal sounds: acute warning.
subfunctions.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are ver, if necessary.
Crossing traffic warning:
vidually switched off. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
Press and hold this button. vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Prewarning

Safety systems are switched on. This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ to the vehicle ahead is too small.
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
Setting the warning time nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Via iDrive: proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
1. "My Vehicle"
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐
2. "Vehicle settings" uation yourself. If necessary, the system provides
3. "Intelligent Safety" assistance, such as with an automatic braking in‐
4. "Frontal Collision Warn." tervention, in a possible risk of collision.
5. Select the desired setting. Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
171
CONTROLS Safety
Brake intervention, City light The driver may cancel the braking intervention
braking function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used Cross-traffic warning: brake intervention is not
when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite is suffi‐ performed in the event of cross traffic.
ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
pedal. limitations of the detection range and functional
The system can additionally assist possibly with limitations.
automatic braking intervention if there is a risk of
a collision. System limits
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop. Safety information
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h. WARNING
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
stability has not been restricted, for instance by rectly, or without justification due to the system
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
The driver may cancel the braking intervention damage to property. Follow the information re‐
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ garding the system limits and actively intervene
tively moving the steering wheel. if needed.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and functional
Upper speed limit
limitations.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
With radar sensor: brake
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
intervention
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
Intersection warning: the vehicle responds to
a warning, the maximum braking force is used
crossing traffic if its own speed is below approx.
when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite is suffi‐
40 mph/65 km/h.
ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake
pedal.
Detection range
The system can assist with automatic braking in‐
The system's detection potential is limited.
tervention if there is a risk of a collision.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
The braking intervention can bring the vehicle to
might come late.
a complete stop.
The following situations may not be detected, for
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
instance:
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
pressure. No automatic delay occurs. or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
172
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. General information

▷ Intersection warning: crossing vehicles if their The system issues a warning and intervenes to
speed is higher than your own speed. support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
Functional limitations ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
lowing situations: sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
viding targeted steering support.
▷ In tight curves. Detection range
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered. Objects that the system can detect are taken
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine into account.
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Safety information
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
WARNING
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Warning sensitivity and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
example the warning time, the more warnings are where appropriate.
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
WARNING
Evasion assistance stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐ risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
when obstacles suddenly appear. tervene where appropriate.
173
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Camera
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.

clean and clear.
Front center bumper.
▷ Approach control warning with light braking
function, refer to page 169, is switched on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
driving off.
Front side bumper.
Warning with evasion support

A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Rear bumper. Brake and increase distance.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
sensors clean and unobstructed. signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
174
Safety CONTROLS
Acute warning with evasion support ▷ In tight curves.

Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
proaches another object at a high differential ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
speed. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐ terior mirror.
uation yourself. If there is a risk of collision, the ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
driver's evasive maneuvers are supported by the porarily switched off due to excessively high
system. temperatures.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
previous forewarning. sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
System limits via the Start/Stop button.
Safety information after vehicle delivery.
WARNING of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ low in the sky.
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ Person warning with City
garding the system limits and actively intervene light braking function
if needed.
Concept
Detection range The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
The system's detection potential is limited. destrians. When driving at city speeds, the sys‐
Thus, a system reaction might not come or tem will issue a warning if there is imminent risk
might come late. of a collision with pedestrians, and support with a
braking function.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
General information
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
The system is active at speeds of approx.
them at high speed.
3 mph/5 km/h up to approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
The system reacts to people who are within the
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
detection range of the system.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. trols the system.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
175
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range
WARNING
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
Overview
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Camera
WARNING
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due clean and clear.
ings or reactions or these might be output late, Switching on/off
tervene where appropriate. The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
176
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off manually Warning with braking function

Press the button.
Display
tem is displayed. If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the The red symbol is displayed and a signal
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ sounds.
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the Alternatively, depending on the vehicle
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting equipment, a red warning triangle lights
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu up in the instrument cluster.
are activated. Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
The following settings are switched be‐ Braking intervention
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are a warning, the maximum braking force is used
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite for the
subfunctions. brake booster is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are ping on the brake pedal.
switched on according to the individual settings. If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ assist with braking.
vidually switched off. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Press and hold this button.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
All Intelligent Safety systems are stability has not been restricted, for instance by
switched off. deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Button Status The driver may cancel the braking intervention

by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
Button lights up green: all Intelligent tively moving the steering wheel.
Safety systems are switched on. Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ limitations of the detection range and functional
gent Safety systems are switched off limitations.
or currently unavailable.

Safety systems are switched off.
177
CONTROLS Safety
System limits ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately

Safety information ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
low in the sky.
WARNING
▷ When it is dark outside.
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
Lane departure warning
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed. Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave
Detection range the lane.
The detection potential of the camera is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ General information
sued late. This camera-based system warns starting at a
The following situations may not be detected, for minimum speed.
instance: The minimum speed is country-specific and is
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ systems.
cause of the viewing angle or contour. Warnings are issued by means of a steering
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm. The time of the warning may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
Functional limitations The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations: Vehicles with side collision warning: if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system intervenes with a
▷ In tight curves. brief active steering intervention in addition to vi‐
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ brating. The system thus helps keep the vehicle
activated, for instance DSC OFF. in the lane.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ Safety information
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ WARNING
temperatures.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine and traffic safety. There is a risk of an accident.
via the Start/Stop button. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
178
Safety CONTROLS
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Camera

propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
WARNING
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The camera must detect the lane markings for Switching on automatically
the lane departure warning to be active. The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
Overview on at the end of the last trip.
Button in the vehicle Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
tem is displayed.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
Intelligent Safety
are activated.

tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
179
CONTROLS Safety
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Setting the force of the steering
switched on according to the individual settings. wheel vibration
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Press and hold this button. 2. "Vehicle settings"
All Intelligent Safety systems are 3. "Steering wheel vibration"
switched off. 4. Select the desired setting.
Button Status The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐

tems and stored for the driver profile currently
Button lights up green: all Intelligent used.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐

Vehicles with side collision warning:
gent Safety systems are switched off turn steering intervention on/off
or currently unavailable. The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
Button does not light up: all Intelligent tion and lane departure warning.
Safety systems are switched off.
Via iDrive:
Setting the warning frequency 1. "My Vehicle"

Via iDrive: 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Steering intervention"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Lane Departure Warn."
5. Select the desired setting. Display in the instrument cluster
▷ "Always": the system issues a warning The system illuminates green: at least
whenever a hazardous situation is de‐ one lane marking was detected and
tected. warnings can be issued.
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a turn Warning function
signal or when purposely driving over lane
markings in curves. If you leave the lane
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting.
If the turn signal is switched on before a lane
change, a warning is not issued.
180
Safety CONTROLS
With side collision warning ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.

If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ such as in construction areas.
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ dirt or water.
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
ing an active steering intervention, the display in ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
the instrument cluster will blink. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
With trailer towing ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
ing is activated, for instance during operation low in the sky.
with trailer or bicycle rack, no steering interven‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
tion takes place. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
End of warning ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high
tions: temperatures.
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
▷ When returning to your own lane. via the Start/Stop button.
▷ When braking hard. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
▷ When using the turn signal.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
system is not fully functional.
System limits
Active Blind Spot
Safety information
Detection
WARNING
Concept
rectly, or without justification due to the system Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
garding the system limits and actively intervene various gradations in these situations.
if needed.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
181
CONTROLS Safety
General information
WARNING
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind and next to the vehicle when Overview
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for Button in the vehicle
the Intelligent Safety systems.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates. Intelligent Safety
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds

between 45 mph/70 km/h and Radar sensors
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and help
to return the vehicle into the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ The radar sensors are located in the rear
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
where appropriate.
sensors clean and unobstructed.
182
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent

The Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically
activated after departure if the function was Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
switched on at the end of the last trip. gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Switching on/off manually Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Press the button. Safety systems are switched off.
tem is displayed. Setting the warning time
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ 3. "Intelligent Safety"
ual settings are activated and stored for the 4. "Blind Spot Detection"
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting 5. Select the desired setting.
are activated. "Off": with this setting, no warning is output.
Press the button repeatedly. rently used.
tween: Setting the force of the steering
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are wheel vibration
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the Via iDrive:
subfunctions.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
vidually switched off. 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
Press and hold this button. tems and stored for the driver profile currently
All Intelligent Safety systems are used.
switched off.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention
on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Via iDrive: tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and

can be manually overridden at any time.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Flashing of the light
3. "Intelligent Safety" A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
4. "Steering intervention" serves as system self-test.
rently used. System limits
Warning function Safety information
Light in the exterior mirror WARNING

if needed.
Upper speed limit

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
Prewarning 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates temporarily.
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐ If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
proaching from behind. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is Functional limitations
in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes lowing situations:
brightly. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
The warning stops when the turn signal is much faster than your own.
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the criti‐ ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
cal zone.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
With side collision warning ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
If at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering wheel ▷ If cargo protrudes.
is ignored and the lane marking crossed, the sys‐ For vehicles with side collision warning, the
tem intervenes with a brief active steering inter‐ steering intervention can be limited, for instance
vention. The steering intervention helps return in the following situation:
the vehicle into the lane. The steering interven‐
184
Safety CONTROLS
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, General information

merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are not white.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
of you.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
low in the sky. area next to the vehicle in the speed range from
approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror. The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
porarily switched off due to excessively high If, for instance another vehicle is detected next to
temperatures. the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via steering intervention.
after vehicle delivery. Safety information
system is not fully functional. WARNING
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
ing is activated, for instance during operation driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
played. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings, for
instance warning time, more warnings can be WARNING
displayed. However, there may also be an excess Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
of premature warnings of critical situations. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Side collision warning incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
Concept conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
185
CONTROLS Safety
Functional requirements Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision warning with steering interven‐
tion to be active. Camera
Overview

clean and clear.
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Radar sensors Switching on automatically

The side collision warning activates automatically
after departure if the function was switched on at
the end of the last trip.

Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Front bumper. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
are activated.

tween:
Rear bumper.
186
Safety CONTROLS
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are System limits

switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions. Safety information
WARNING
Press and hold this button. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
All Intelligent Safety systems are garding the system limits and actively intervene
switched off. if needed.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Functional limitations

Safety systems are switched on. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
or currently unavailable. much faster than your own.
Safety systems are switched off. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
Warning function
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Light in the exterior mirror ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
of you.
low in the sky.
If there is a risk of collision
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ terior mirror.
brates. An active steering intervention takes
place to prevent collisions and maintain the vehi‐
cle within its own lane. The steering intervention
temperatures.
can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time.
187
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine Safety information

WARNING
system is not fully functional.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
ing is activated, for instance during operation Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be where appropriate.
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
WARNING
Rear collision prevention Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
Concept ings or reactions or these might be output late,
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
behind. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
General information tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain
speed, the system responds as follows:
▷ Active Protection, refer to page 189: if a colli‐
The radar sensors are located in the rear
sion seems to be unavoidable, PreCrash
bumper.
functions are triggered.
Switching on/off
driving off.
188
Safety CONTROLS
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
tions: brake lights additionally light up.
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer
towing is activated, for instance during opera‐ Active Protection
tion with trailer or bicycle rack.
Concept
System limits Active Protection prepares occupants and the
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or
lowing situations: collision situations.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own. General information
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
slowly. functions, which can vary depending on the
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. equipment.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This
includes the following critical driving situations:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Brake force display Certain functions of several systems can, within
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐
Concept gering:
Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐ ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐
ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk tion: automatic brake intervention.
of a rear-end collision. ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐
tion: brake booster.
General information ▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of immi‐
nent rear collisions.
Safety information
WARNING
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, critical situation could not be detected
reliably or in time. There is a risk of an accident.
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
brake lights light up.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
189
CONTROLS Safety
Function To do this, for a short time the braking pressure

applied when stepping on the brake pedal must
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
be higher than the braking pressure achieved by
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
the automatic braking function. This interrupts
ened once after driving away.
automatic braking.
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
Interrupting automatic braking
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
belts.
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow sive maneuver.
gap.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
sunroof, including sun protection.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
rest for the front passenger seat.
Alertness assistant
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
Concept
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ The system can detect decreasing alertness or
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
safety belt before continuing on your trip. trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
All other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
Safety information
PostCrash – iBrake WARNING

Concept driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
In the event of an accident, the system can bring physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
vention by the driver in certain situations. This in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
consequences thereof. driving style to traffic conditions.
At standstill Function
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
matically.
state is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
Harder vehicle braking
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
situations to a halt quicker.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
190
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering System limits

behavior.
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip. uations, for instance and will either output an in‐
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system correct warning or no warning at all:
is active and can also display a recommendation ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
to take a break.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
Break recommendation
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
Switching on/off, adjusting
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
The alertness assistant is active automatically
changing lanes frequently.
with each switching on of drive-ready state and
can thus display a break recommendation. ▷ When the road surface is poor.
The break recommendation can also be ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
Via iDrive: parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Driver attention control"
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, the following settings can be
selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated after
20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
191
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
ing these functions and systems, the applicable Concept
laws and regulations must be observed. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
Anti-lock Braking System
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
ABS 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐ Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
tive safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
Concept
When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system
automatically produces the greatest possible Within the physical limits, the system helps to
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. engine speed and by braking the individual
This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro‐ wheels.
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
General information
for the duration of the emergency stop. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
192
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
WARNING
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
curves.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust as soon as possible.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC
ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of light go out.
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
193
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
Control where forward momentum is optimized. lights up.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ Deactivating DTC
what limited driving stability. Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
General information light go out.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster.
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
▷ When driving with snow chains. vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle The system automatically switches to "DSC ON"
in the following situations:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dynamic
Stability Control further optimizes traction and
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the
194
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐ When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
manded by the driving situation and road surface. the speed set by the driver, without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
Display on the Control Display While HTC is controlling the speed, the system
automatically distributes the braking force to the
Displaying xDrive view individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐
Via iDrive: ity and stability. If necessary, the Antilock Brake
System prevents the wheels from locking.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action" General information
3. "xDrive status" Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
The following information is displayed: below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
▷ With a navigation system: compass display Speeds can be set between approx.
for the driving direction. 2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
centage.
physical limits.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication.
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle. Overview

Automatic Differential
Brake
The system controls the driving force by auto‐
matic braking intervention on individual wheels.
The function corresponds to a differential lock:
the system detects if a wheel begins to spin, be‐
cause of loose road surface, for instance and au‐
tomatically brakes it.
The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
HDC
better traction.
As a result, the engine force is transferred more
efficiently to the wheels during accelerations. Activating HDC
Press the button. The LED above the but‐
HDC Hill Descent Control ton lights up.
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐
Concept prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐
sired speed.
Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control
feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the
downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐ emergency braking function, refer to page 213,
paved roads. is deactivated.
195
Display in the instrument cluster Using the brake pedal

A symbol and the selected de‐ While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐
sired speed are displayed. sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal.
▷ Green display: HDC is active,
the system is reducing the ve‐
hicle speed. Deactivating HDC
▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby. Press the button again. The LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Display in the Head-up Display
The HDC status can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display. Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in
Increasing or decreasing vehicle the instrument cluster.
speed
Using the cruise control rocker Variable sport steering

switch
The variable sport steering facilitates a direct and
The desired speed can be changed using the agile driving style with little steering effort. The
cruise control rocker switch on the steering variable sports steering works independently of
wheel. the current speed, varying the steering ratio in
line with the steering angle.
▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐

creases gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
speed increases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐
creases gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
speed decreases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
196
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems

WARNING
options The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
It also describes features that are not necessarily ▷ On winding roads.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ In heavy traffic.
options or country versions. This also applies to ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.
Cruise control
WARNING
Concept
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information Overview

Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain Buttons on the steering wheel
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle. Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to

Safety information page 198.
Pause cruise control, refer to

WARNING
page 198.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 199.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Store speed, refer to page 198.
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
Rocker switch:
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate. Set speed, refer to page 198.
197
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Switching cruise control on/off Setting the speed
Switching on Maintaining and storing the speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light

up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
Switching off
When the system is switched on, the current
Press the button on the steering wheel. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
deleted.
page 199, in the speedometer and briefly in the
instrument cluster.
Pausing cruise control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Interrupting manually
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
When active, press the button. ton.
Press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
Changing the speed
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when selector lever
position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
198
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the ▷ Orange/white marking: system is interrupted,
resistance point, the desired speed increases the marking indicates the stored speed.
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Indicator light
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ ▷ Indicator light green: system is active.
pends on the vehicle. ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance been interrupted.
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
Status display
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the The selected desired speed is hidden af‐
switch beyond the resistance point causes ter a brief time.
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Continuing cruise control
Some system information can also be displayed
An interrupted cruise control can be continued in the Head-up Display.
by calling up the stored speed.
The symbol is displayed when the set
Make sure that the difference between current
desired speed is reached.
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur. System limits
Press the button with the system inter‐ The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
rupted. The speed may not be maintained on uphill
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ grades if the engine power is insufficient.
ues. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
In the following cases, the stored speed value is some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
deleted and cannot be called up again: grades.
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Active Cruise Control with
Displays in the instrument Stop & Go function ACC
cluster
Concept
Display in the speedometer
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
tive, the marking indicates the the buttons on the steering wheel.
desired speed.
199
The system maintains the desired speed on In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
ates or brakes automatically. ▷ Set the parking brake.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set turn the front wheels in the direction of the
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The curb.
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
wheel chock.
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles WARNING
driving ahead of you.
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
control characteristic can change in certain cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
PRO driving mode is more gentle. tervene where appropriate.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed. WARNING
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
the system is able to detect this within the given ing situations:
system limits.
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
Safety information
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
WARNING
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the where appropriate.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Overview
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Buttons on the steering wheel
ate.
Button Function
WARNING Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 201.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Store/maintain speed, refer to
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ page 202.
ing.
200
Button Function Camera

Pause cruise control, refer to
page 202.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 203.
Without steering and lane control as‐

sistant:
Increase distance, refer to page 203.
Without steering and lane control as‐

sistant:
Reduce distance, refer to page 203.
clean and clear.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Area of application
Adjust distance, refer to page 203.
The system is best used on well-constructed
Rocker switch: roads.
Set speed, refer to page 202. The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
With steering and lane control assis‐
The maximum speed that can be set is
tant:
115 mph/180 km/h.
Steering and lane control assistant
The system can also be activated when station‐
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer to
ary.
page 206.
Switching on/off and interrupting

Radar sensor
cruise control
Switching on
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light

up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. maintained and stored as desired speed.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
structed. necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
201
Press the button on the steering wheel. Setting the speed
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is Maintaining and storing the speed
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press

on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
The system is automatically interrupted in the the system is interrupted.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
speed.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
page 203, in the speedometer and briefly in the
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. instrument cluster.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
door is opened while the vehicle is standing necessary.
still.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an ton.
extended period, for instance on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder Press the button.
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired, Changing the speed
for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
tem.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly

until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
202
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the With steering and lane control
resistance point, the desired speed increases assistant: adjusting distance
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the button repeatedly until the
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past desired distance is set.
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the Continuing cruise control
action. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Adjusting distance Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
Safety information calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
WARNING Press the button with the system inter‐
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the rupted.
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of ac‐ ues.
cidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware
to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the In the following cases, the stored speed value is
distance to the traffic and weather conditions deleted and cannot be called up again:
and maintain the prescribed safety distance, ▷ When the system is switched off.
possibly by braking. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument

Without steering and lane control
assistant: reducing distance cluster
Press the button repeatedly until the Display in the speedometer
desired distance is set.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
Instrument cluster will display selected distance, tive, the marking indicates the
refer to page 204. desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: system
Without steering and lane control is interrupted, the marking in‐
assistant: increasing distance dicates the stored speed.
Press the button repeatedly until the ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance, Status display

refer to page 204. The selected desired speed is hidden af‐
ter a brief time.
203
Distance to vehicle ahead of you Detected vehicle

Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown. Symbol Description
Symbol Description Green symbol:

A vehicle has been detected
Distance 1
ahead of you. The system main‐
tains the set distance to the ve‐
hicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the

Distance 2 vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move
away.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
Distance 3
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes:

Distance 4
The conditions are not adequate
This value is set automatically
for the system to work.
after the system is switched on.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
System interrupted. tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐

tance bars flash red and an
No distance control display, as acoustic signal sounds:
the accelerator pedal is being Brake and make an evasive ma‐
pressed. neuver, if necessary.
Desired speed
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
204
Distance information Swerving vehicles

The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐

ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
to page 154.
▷ Distance too short. A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
vehicle.
System limits If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
Detection range
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
▷ For red traffic lights.
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
▷ For cross traffic. into a curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ For oncoming traffic. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
205
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐
tentionally exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations, for instance on down‐
hill or uphill grades.
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
Malfunction
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After Radar sensor
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
activated and controls speed independently. sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for instance during parking.
Driving off A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐

tem fails.
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example: Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
▷ On steep uphill grades. pair shop.
▷ From bumps in the road. The system may be impaired when the detection
▷ With a heavy trailer. range of the radar sensor is partially covered
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. such as by the license plate holder.
Weather Camera
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ The function for detecting and responding when
orable weather or light conditions: approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
Check Control message is displayed.
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall. Steering and lane control
▷ Slush. assistant
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare. Concept
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
stance by braking, steering or evading. tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
206
General information
The system determines the position of the lane
markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched. Front center bumper.
Safety information
WARNING
Front side bumper.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Overview
Button on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering and lane control assistant

incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer to Rear bumper.
page 208.
Radar sensors
207
Camera Steering wheel symbol lights up green.

The system is active.
With the system switched on, the person warn‐

ing with City braking function and the side colli‐
sion warning are active.
Switching off
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. The indicator goes out.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror The system does not perform supportive steer‐
clean and clear. ing wheel movements.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h. following situations:
▷ Sufficient lane width. ▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐ ▷ When the steering wheel is released.
ing on both sides is detected.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐ ▷ When you leave your own lane.
tected. ▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. ▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ Wide curves. ▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐
▷ Drive in the center of the lane. tected and there is no vehicle driving in front.
▷ Turn signal switched off. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.

▷ The sensor system calibration process is The system is on standby and does not
complete. manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all

Switching on/off function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 208.
Switching on
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.

The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 208.
208
Displays in the instrument Symbol Description

cluster Yellow steering wheel symbol:
Symbol Description The hands are not grasping the

steering wheel. The system is
Gray steering wheel symbol: still active.
The system is on standby.
Red steering wheel symbol and
Green steering wheel symbol: a signal sounds:
The system is activated. The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interrup‐
Yellow steering wheel symbol
tion is imminent.
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble: The system does not perform
supportive steering wheel move‐
System interruption is imminent.
ments.
Green steering wheel symbol With Active Cruise Control, the
and lane marking symbol: system may reduce the speed.
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
All system information can also be displayed in
Green steering wheel symbol, the Head-up Display.
gray lane marking symbol:
No lane marking detected, the Lane change assistant
vehicle follows the vehicle
ahead. Concept
The limits of steering support The system additionally supports the driver when
when cornering may have been changing lanes on multilane roads.
reached.
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and lane control assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 208.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming
traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Sensor system of the system is active and a
vehicle approaching from the rear can be de‐
tected.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection and steering in‐
tervention are switched on, refer to page 181.
209
▷ Speed between approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h garding the system limits and actively intervene
and approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h. if needed.
Changing lanes
Hands on the steering wheel
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes. The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
contact in the following situations:
2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to
page 127, in the required direction to the ▷ Driving with gloves.
pressure point for signaling briefly and hold it ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
there.
Steering support in the required direction can Narrow lanes
be detected a short time later. When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
vehicle in the new lane. ▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ings.
Canceling a lane change ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
If the turn signal lever is released too soon, the already recognized.
system helps the driver keep to the original lane. Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
System limits ▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
General information
▷ Slush.
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
▷ Fog.
used in certain situations.
▷ Glare.
Safety information Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
WARNING
210
PDC Park Distance Control

WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Concept Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
are approaching slowly in front of or behind the risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐ Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
play on the Control Display. driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
With Parking Assistant: obstacles on the side of is not yet active.
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
the parking assistant, may also be reported by
the side protection function, refer to page 214. Overview
General information Button in the vehicle

The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic Park assistance button
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Ultrasound sensors
Safety information Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
WARNING
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Functional requirements
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Ensure full functionality:
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ers, bicycle racks.
ate. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
211
Switching on/off WARNING
Switching on automatically Signal tones

The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations: General information
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when When approaching an object, an intermittent
the engine is running. sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if
an object is detected to the left rear of the vehi‐
▷ While approaching detected obstacles if the
cle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
speaker.
The activation distance depends on the situa‐
tion in question. The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
Via iDrive:
sounded.
1. "My Vehicle" If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐
2. "Vehicle settings" hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
3. "Parking" than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant
tone will sound.
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on
the vehicle equipment. Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
and constant tone are switched off if the selector
5. "Automatic PDC activation" lever position P is engaged.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
rently used. time when the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on. Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
Automatic deactivation during entertainment volume can be adjusted.
forward travel Via iDrive:
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded. 1. "My Vehicle"
Switch the system back on, if needed. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
Switching on/off manually 4. "Volume settings"
Press park assistance button. 5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
▷ On: the LED lights up. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
▷ Off: the LED goes out. rently used.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
212
Visual warning The function is available from walking speed

while backing up or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐
ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator
pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐
The approach of the vehicle to an object is sible at any time.
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
farther away are already displayed on the Control and parking assistant.
Display before a signal sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.

Safety information
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red. WARNING
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
of the required space. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
tively intervene where appropriate.
"Rear view camera"
Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 230: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the Activating/deactivating the system
PDC display against vehicles approaching in the Via iDrive:
front or rear from the side.
1. "My Vehicle"
With parking assistant and 2. "Vehicle settings"
Steptronic transmission: 3. "Parking"
emergency braking function, 4. "Active PDC with braking interv."
Active PDC 5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
Concept rently used.
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of System limits
collision. The system cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations, for example:
General information
▷ When Hill Descent Control, refer to page 195,
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ is active, the emergency braking function is
vented under all circumstances. deactivated.
213
▷ When driving with a trailer. The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive tured.
where applicable. Side protection is not available, if the trailer
power socket is in use or trailer towing is acti‐
With Parking Assistant: side vated.
protection
System limits
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
Safety information
the vehicle.
WARNING
General information The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC rectly, or without justification due to the system
and parking assistant. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
Display garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
With trailer or trailer power socket in

use
With a trailer, a trailer power socket in use or
when trailer towing is activated, the two rear PDC
functions will be switched off.
White symbol is displayed.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle Depending on the vehicle equipment,
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the the range of the sensors is shown as a
sides. shaded area on the Control Display.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
were detected. the following situations:
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the ▷ For small children and animals.
vehicle was not yet captured.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
Limits of side protection ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
The system only displays stationary obstacles for instance from passing vehicles or loud
that were previously detected by sensors while machines.
passing them. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
The system does not detect whether an obstacle or out of position.
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
214
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. rages.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
vehicles. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on straight.
▷ With moving objects. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as sweeping machines, high pressure steam
ledges. cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
smooth surfaces. PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure page 212, for instance in automatic vehicle
such as fences. washes.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Malfunction
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of White symbol is displayed, and the range
the lane. of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material. PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
▷ With plants and bushes. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance ice center or repair shop.
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Without Surround View:
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of rearview camera
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system. Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
False warnings
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐ play.
cle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain. Safety information
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
WARNING
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
215
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ Automatic deactivation during
tively intervene where appropriate. forward travel
distance or speed is exceeded.
Overview
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
Park assistance button Switching the view via iDrive

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
Camera
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the clear. Protruding cargo or roof rack systems
tailgate. can limit the detection range of the camera.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If ▷ Trailers that are not connected at a trailer
necessary, clean the camera lens. socket can limit the detection range of the
camera.
Switching on/off Assistance functions

Switching on automatically General information
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ More than one assistance function can be active
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine at the same time.
is running.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
216
▷ "Parking aid lines". Turning radius lines

Pathway lines and turning radius lines are dis‐
played, refer to page 217.
▷ "Obstacle marking".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ob‐
stacles detected by PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol are displayed, refer to page 217, by
markings.
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom".
A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is dis‐
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
played, refer to page 218.
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Parking aid lines
Turning radius lines show the course of the
Pathway lines smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ the green pathway line covers the corre‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level sponding turning radius line.
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and Obstacle marking
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles

behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
217
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Detection of objects

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
Control. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Zoom on trailer hitch Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can sistance functions also consider data from the
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch. PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Surround View with

Parking Assistant Plus
Two static circle segments show the distance
between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
Concept
A docking line dependent on the steering angle
The system provides assistance in parking and
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
hitch.
shown on the Control Display.
When zooming in, remember that the view may
no longer show certain obstacles. General information
Several cameras capture the area from different
Setting brightness and contrast selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
via iDrive functions, for instance guidelines, can be faded
into the display.
With the rearview camera switched on:
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
1. Move the Controller to the left. played:
2. ▷ "Brightness" ▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
▷ "Contrast" page 220: the system shows the camera
3. Set the desired value. perspective suitable for the respective driving
situation.
System limits ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 220: for rep‐
resenting the areas behind the vehicle.
Deactivated camera ▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the page 222: for representing the areas on the
tailgate is open, the camera image is displayed sides of the vehicle.
hatched in gray. ▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, refer
to page 220.
218
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 223: to Cameras

present cross traffic, for instance at junctions
and driveways, depending on the currently
engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment around
the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Front camera
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle

Rearview camera
Park assistance button

One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐
Panorama View terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the

camera lenses. If required, clean the camera
lenses.
Switching on/off
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
219
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐ Side view

tive driving situation is displayed. The side view can be selected for the right or left
vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
Press park assistance button. the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
▷ On: the LED lights up. The side view looks from rear to front and in case
▷ Off: the LED goes out. of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic camera perspective
Automatic deactivation during The automatic camera perspective shows a
forward travel steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
ing direction.
distance or speed is exceeded. This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
Camera perspective changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
Overview
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable camera perspective

With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
1 Function bar tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
2 Selection window By turning the Controller or via touch function,
3 Side view specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
4 Automatic camera perspective lected.
5 Movable camera perspective The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol.
6 Camera image
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable camera
7 Rearview camera
perspective can be moved around the circle us‐
ing BMW Gesture Control, refer to page 53.
Selection window To leave the circle, move the Controller sideways
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐ and press or tap the active camera symbol via
lected in the selection window via iDrive. the touchscreen.
220
Rearview camera Parking aid lines

This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era. Pathway lines
Function bar
Assistance functions, refer to page 221, can be
activated via the function bar and settings ap‐
plied.
▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 225.
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 224.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 224.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 221. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 222. quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom", refer to page 222.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 222.
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to movements.
use the activation points for Panorama View.
Turning radius lines

Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
The following assistance functions can be man‐
ually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines".
▷ "Obstacle marking".
▷ "Trailer hitch - zoom". Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
▷ "Car wash". on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed: Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
▷ Side protection, refer to page 222.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 223. steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
221
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Two static circle segments show the distance

between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering angle
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
hitch.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the Show the trailer hitch via iDrive, refer to
PDC Park Distance Control sensors. page 221.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera When zooming in, remember that the view may
image. no longer show certain obstacles.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Side protection
Control.
Concept
Vehicle wash view The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a

vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
cle's own track.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
Zoom on trailer hitch sides.
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can ▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
222
Limits of side protection Panorama View

The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while Concept
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
The system provides an early look at cross traffic
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐ at blind driveways and intersections.
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening
angles of the doors.
General information
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic
area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for
distance estimations.
Steptronic transmission: the maximum opening
angles of the doors are displayed in selector
Display on the Control Display
lever position P. Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐
ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines. Depending on the driving direction, the image of
the respective camera is displayed:
Limits of the display ▷ "front": front camera image.
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐ ▷ "rear": rear camera image.
torted image for technical reasons.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cross‐
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles ing traffic warning, refer to page 230, can addi‐
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐ tionally warn against oncoming vehicles using ra‐
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐ dar sensors.
ing next to other objects:
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
223
With navigation system: activation A list of all activation points is displayed.

points
Renaming or deleting activation points
Concept
1. Press button.
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation 2. Move the Controller to the left.
points provided that a GPS signal is received. 3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
General information
4. Select an activation point as needed.
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
5. ▷ "Rename"
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera. ▷ "Delete this activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
Storing activation points
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to Setting brightness and contrast
be switched on, and stop. Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
2. Press button. Via iDrive:
4. "Add activation point"
2. ▷ "Brightness"
The current position is displayed.
▷ "Contrast"
5. "Add activation point"
3. Set the desired value.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
The system can be used only to a limited extent
Using activation points in the following situations:
The use of activation points can be switched on ▷ In poor light.
and off. ▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
1. Press button. ▷ With the tailgate open.
2. Move the Controller to the left. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
3. "Settings" Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
4. "Panorama view, GPS-based" open door, in the camera image mark areas that
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based" are currently not displayed.
Displaying activation points System limits
1. Press button. Non-visible areas

2. Move the Controller to the left. Because of the camera angle, the areas under
3. "Show activation points" the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
224
Detection of objects Switching the function on/off

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding Via iDrive:
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
1. With the standby state switched on: "My
the system.
Vehicle"
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
3. "Data privacy"
Follow, refer to page 211, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter. 4. "Remote 3D View"
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate Functional limitations
the distance from the objects on the display. The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
Malfunction ▷ In poor light.
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control ▷ In case of soiled cameras.
Display. ▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in
A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐ the display indicate areas that are not re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐ corded by the system.
era is displayed in black on the Control ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Display. ▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle.
Remote 3D View ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
Concept ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐ every country.
nected App and the camera images from Sur‐ ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
round View can be used to display the vehicle can only be used three times within two
surroundings on a mobile device such as a hours.
smartphone.
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation. Parking Assistant
Functional requirements Concept
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 62.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
225
The system supports parking in the following sit‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
uations: closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel ate.
parking.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road,
diagonal parking. The system orients itself WARNING
with the middle of the parking space during If the trailer hitch is used, the parking assistant
diagonal parking. can cause damage due to covered sensors.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
General information property. The parking assistant should not be
used during trailer towing or if the trailer hitch is
Handling used, for instance bicycle rack.
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
NOTICE
▷ Switching on and activating.
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
▷ Parking space search.
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
▷ Parking. property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
System status and instructions on required ac‐ tervene where appropriate.
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on The safety information for PDC Park Distance
both sides of the vehicle. Control, refer to page 211, and for opening the
tailgate, refer to page 89, applies in addition.
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ Overview
ble parking line and takes control of the following
functions during the parking procedure: Button in the vehicle
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Press and hold the park assistance button for the
duration of the parking procedure.
Parking is automatic.
Safety information
Park assistance button
WARNING
226
Ultrasound sensors ▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's

width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows, ▷ The parking brake is released.
and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐
Steptronic transmission:
tance Control in the bumpers, the parking
spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐ ▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
stacles determined.
Switching on and activating
Functional requirements Switching on with the button
Ultrasound sensors Press park assistance button.
Ensure full functionality: The LED lights up.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ The current status of the parking space search is
ers. indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. Parking assistant is activated automatically.
For measuring parking spaces Switching on with reverse gear

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. Shift into reverse.
22 mph/35 km/h.
The current status of the parking space search is
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: indicated on the Control Display.
5 ft/1.5 m.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Suitable parking space

General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length System activated/deactivated
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum Sym‐ Meaning
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. bol
Parallel parking to the road: Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your White: the system is available but not
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. activated.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The system is activated.
Diagonal parking:
227
Parking space search and system Engage the reverse gear and activate the
status system or press the parking assistance but‐
ton, refer to page 227, on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and
at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
Control Display, refer to page 228.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking parking procedure: switch on the turn signal
assistant is activated and the parking space on the corresponding side.
search is active. The system takes over the steering.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ play.
hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is
active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ Steptronic transmission:
lighted in color and a signal sounds. Switch Press and hold the park assistance button for
signal tone on/off, refer to page 229. the duration of the parking procedure. At the
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly end of the parking procedure, the P selector
detected, the system automatically adjusts lever position is set.
the suitable parking method. In the case of The end of the parking procedure is indicated
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐ on the Control Display.
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
this case, the desired parking method must needed.
be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ Interrupting manually
tive. Steering control has been The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
taken over by system. time:
▷ Steptronic transmission: release the
park assistance button during the park‐
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ ing procedure.
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking The system is interrupted automatically in the
assistant
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
Parking takes over steering.
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐ ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
tant. surfaces.
228
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to 3. "Parking"

overcome, such as curbs. 4. "Parking Assistant"
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ 5. "Sound if parking space detected"
pear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays rently used.
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or System limits
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the Safety information
Control Display.
Steptronic transmission: WARNING
▷ When the park assistance button is released. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
▷ If the tailgate is open. rectly, or without justification due to the system
▷ If doors are open. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration. if needed.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
extended period while the vehicle is station‐
ary. No parking assistance
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Resuming ▷ When towing a trailer.
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ ▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
ued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to Functional limitations
page 227, and follow the instructions on the The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
Control Display. lowing situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
Switching off roads.
The system can be switched off manually: ▷ On slippery ground.
Press park assistance button. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
Switching signal tone for ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
suitable parking spaces on/off ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
Via iDrive: parking space.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
2. "Vehicle settings" of a port.
229
Limits of ultrasonic measurement Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
the following situations: tected at all.
▷ For small children and animals.

Malfunction
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position. Crossing traffic warning
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
Concept
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
vehicles.
detected sooner by the system than is possible
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. from the driver's seat.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as General information
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the lane. the area behind the vehicle.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in The system indicates approaching traffic.
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
front bumpers.
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
230
Safety information
WARNING
where appropriate. Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐
tional radar sensors are located in the front
bumpers.
Overview
Button in the vehicle sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
Park assistance button 5. "Cross traffic alert"
Radar sensors
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
The radar sensors are located in the rear

Switching off automatically
bumper.
The system is automatically switched off in the
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
231
▷ With the steering and lane control assistant Display in the camera view
active: when a certain driving distance is ex‐
ceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐
ing assistant.
WARNING
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
light in the exterior mirror may flash. camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Light in the exterior mirror Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
are detected by the rear sensors and your own lowing situations:
vehicle is moving backwards. ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
Display in the PDC Park Distance ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
Control view ▷ In tight curves.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
ing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, crossing traffic warn‐
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
ing is not available for the area behind the vehi‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
cle.
are detected by the sensors.
232
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and Adaptive M chassis
options
Concept
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport
cific and optional features offered with the series. chassis/suspension. This system reduces unde‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily sirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐
options or country versions. This also applies to ces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
comfort depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
Adaptive chassis General information

The system offers several different damping set‐
tings.
Concept
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
trol, refer to page 137.
on uneven road surfaces.
Driving mode Damper tuning
General information SPORT Firm
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
comfort depending on the road surface condition SPORT PLUS Firm
and driving style. COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced out
Tuning
The system offers several different damping set‐ Performance Control
tings.
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐ Performance Control enhances the agility of the
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐ vehicle.
trol, refer to page 137. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
Driving mode Damper tuning individually when a sporty driving style is used.
The resulting braking power is simultaneously
COMFORT Balanced out largely compensated by an engine intervention.
ECO PRO
SPORT Firm
233
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the
following components: Climate control functions
▷ Emission tested car's interior.
Button Function
▷ Microfilter.
Temperature, refer to page 235.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
▷ Ionization. Climate control operation, refer
▷ Fragrancing. to page 235.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC. AUTO program, refer to
▷ Parked-car ventilation. page 235.
▷ Parked-car heating. Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 236.
Air flow, manual, refer to

page 236.
Air distribution, manual, refer to

page 236.
234
Climate control CONTROLS
Button Function Air conditioning

Rear window defroster, refer to
Concept
page 237.
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
Seat heating, refer to page 112. humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
Switching on/off drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on Switching on/off

Press any button except for the following: Press the button.
▷ Rear window defroster. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
▷ Left side of air flow button. tioning switched on.
▷ Seat heating. Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Switching off
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Press and hold the left button until the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
system switches off. ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched on automatically
Temperature with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
Concept densation water develops and collects under‐
The automatic climate control achieves the set neath the vehicle.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, AUTO program
and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Settings The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
Turn the ring to set the desired the car's interior automatically.
temperature. The air distribution and temperature are control‐
Do not rapidly switch between dif‐ led automatically depending on the temperature
ferent temperature settings. Oth‐ in the car's interior and the desired temperature
erwise, the automatic climate setting including the selected intensity of the air
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the flow.
set temperature.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature and out‐
side influences, the air is directed to the wind‐
235
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the Operation

floor area.
Press the left or right side of the button:
The air conditioning, refer to page 235, is decrease or increase air flow.
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest
gram.
level is active when seven LEDs are lit.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Recirculated-air mode
Controlling the air distribution
Concept manually
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
Concept
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. justed manually.
Operation Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐ Turn the wheel to select the de‐
erating mode: sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
▷ Windows.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
▷ Upper body region.
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
conditions. area.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Floor area.

ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
ging of the windows increases. Defrosting windows and
removing condensation
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
Concept
page 236.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Controlling the air flow manually
Settings
Concept
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
dows and remove condensation:
manually.
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
236
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed. Button Function
Rear window defroster Maximum cooling, refer to

page 238.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
AUTO program, refer to
page 238.
The function is available with the engine running.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐ Recirculated-air mode, refer to
ically after a certain period of time. page 239.
Air flow, manual, refer to

Microfilter page 240.
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
page 240.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 334. SYNC program, refer to
page 240.
Defrost and defog window, refer

Automatic climate control to page 240.
with enhanced features Rear window defroster, refer to
page 241.
Overview
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 113.
Seat heating, refer to page 112.
Open the Climate menu, refer to

page 237.
For the following settings, for in‐
stance: upper body temperature
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐
tion.
Climate control functions Opening the Climate menu

Press the button.
Button Function
Temperature, refer to page 238. The Climate menu is displayed.

All the climate control functions which can ad‐
justed via iDrive can be called up via the Climate
menu, e.g., upper body temperature adjustment,
parked-car ventilation.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 238.
237
Switching on/off Switching on/off

Press the button.
Switching on
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
Press any button except for the following: tioning switched on.
▷ Rear window defroster.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
▷ Left side of air flow button.
running.
▷ SYNC program.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
▷ Seat heating. side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
▷ Seat ventilation. ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched on automatically
Switching off with the AUTO program.
Press and hold the left button until the When using the automatic climate control, con‐
system switches off. densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Temperature Maximum cooling

Concept Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
drive-ready state switched on.
General information
Settings
The function is available with external tempera‐
Turn the ring to set the desired tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
temperature. drive-ready state switched on.
Do not rapidly switch between dif‐
ferent temperature settings. Oth‐ Switching on/off
erwise, the automatic climate
Press the button.
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature. The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air conditioning Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Concept Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ gram active.
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again. AUTO program
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on. Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
238
The air distribution and temperature are control‐ General information

led automatically depending on the temperature If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
in the car's interior and the desired temperature tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
setting including the selected intensity of the air automatically.
flow.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
Switching on/off
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
Press the button. ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO ging of the windows increases.
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐ Switching on/off
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐ Via iDrive:
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area. 1. "My Vehicle"
The air conditioning, refer to page 238, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram. 4. If necessary, "Air quality"
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ 5. "Automatic air recirculation"
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
densation as much as possible. culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐ page 240.
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Recirculated-air mode
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ Concept
sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐ You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
trol for the air flow and air distribution. in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of Operation

the automatic climate control. Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
Automatic recirculated-air ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
control AUC
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
Concept
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
mode switches off automatically after a certain
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
amount of time, depending on the environmental
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
conditions.
air is recirculated.
239
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Windows and upper body.
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐ ▷ Upper body region.
ging of the windows increases.
The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ play of the automatic climate control.
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to If there is window condensation, defog the win‐
page 240. dows, refer to page 240.
Controlling the air flow manually SYNC program
Concept Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted The following settings of the driver's side can be
manually. transferred to the front-passenger side and the
rear:
General information ▷ Temperature.
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐ ▷ Air distribution.
gram first.
Switching on/off
Operation
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of The program is switched off automatically if the
the automatic climate control. settings on the front passenger side or in the
The air flow of the automatic climate control may rear are changed.
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Defrosting windows and
Controlling the air distribution removing condensation
manually
Concept
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ the windshield and the front side windows.
justed manually.
Switching on/off
Operation
Press the button.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
The LED is illuminated with the system
program:
switched on.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
▷ Upper body region and floor area. system switched on.
▷ Floor area.
If there is window condensation, press
▷ Windows and floor area. the button or switch on the air condi‐
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
240
tioning to utilize the condensation sensor. Make Front ventilation

sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Overview
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the engine running.

The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the row 1.
incoming air. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐ of the vents, arrow 2.
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
the vehicle.
Varying the temperature of the
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle ventilation
maintenance, refer to page 334.
General information
Ventilation The temperature of the ventilation in the upper

body area can be varied.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
Concept colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐ The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
justed. range heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
Adjusting the ventilation This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct Settings
or indirect ventilation. Via iDrive:
Direct ventilation 1. "My Vehicle"

The air flow is directed towards the passengers. 2. "Vehicle settings"
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
on the adjusted temperature. 4. "Temperature adjustment, upper body"
5. Set the desired temperature.
Indirect ventilation
▷ Toward blue: colder.
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐ ▷ Toward red: warmer.
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
241
Ventilation in rear, center Button Function
Switch off the system, refer to

page 242.
Seat heating, refer to page 112.
Climate control functions in

detail
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ Switching on/off
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing Via iDrive
of the vents, arrow 2. 1. "My Vehicle"
Rear automatic climate 4. "Rear climate"
control The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
Overview switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ OFF button.
▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off

Press the button.
Temperature
Climate control functions
Concept
Button Function
The automatic climate control achieves the set
Temperature, refer to page 242. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
AUTO program, refer to
page 243.
Settings
page 243.
decrease or increase temperature.
242
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐
play of the automatic climate control. perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ bly heated using the residual engine heat.
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the General information
set temperature. The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
AUTO program The activation time is determined based on the
external temperature. The system promptly
Concept switches on before the selected departure time.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
trolled automatically. Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
Switching on/off and not in drive-ready state.
Press the button. ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
program switched on. vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
Depending on the selected temperature and out‐ the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
side influences, the air is directed to the upper hicle battery. The system will be available
body and into the floor area. again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
Controlling the air distribution are set correctly.
manually
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Concept
Switching on/off directly
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
General information
Operation There are different ways to switch the system on
or off.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program: The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
▷ Upper body region. run for some time after being switched off.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
Using the button
▷ Floor area.
When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
Parked-car ventilation automatic climate control buttons.
Press any button except:
Concept ▷ Rear window defroster.
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before ▷ Left side of air flow button.
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐ ▷ Seat heating.
243
▷ SYNC program. Departure time

▷ MENU.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ Concept
ing the vehicle. Different departure times can be adjusted to en‐
sure a comfortable interior temperature in the ve‐
Via iDrive hicle at the time of departure.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
2. "Vehicle settings" set.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions" The system is switched on once.
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/ ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
ventilation" of the week can be set.
5. "Activate now" On the desired weekdays, the system will be

switched on promptly before the set depar‐
ture time.
Via BMW display key
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
Switching on ▷ Set departure times.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display ▷ Activate departure times.
key.
2. "Precondit. setting" Setting the departure time
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
Via iDrive
4. "Activate now"
1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Start"
Switching off 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display 4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
key. ventilation"
2. "Precondit. setting" 5. Select the desired departure time.
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. 6. Set the departure time.
4. "Stop" 7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Display Via BMW display key

symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐ 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
cates the system is switched on. key.
REST is displayed on the automatic climate con‐ 2. "Precondit. setting"
trol. The residual engine heat is used. 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
244
Activating the departure time General information

Two different fragrances can be selected in the
Functional requirement vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
If a departure time is to influence the switching by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐ The following criteria can influence the percep‐
parture time must be activated first. tion of scents in the car's interior:
Via iDrive ▷ Automatic climate control settings.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Temperature and air humidity.
2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Time of day and season.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions" ▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,

for instance fatigue.
4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
ventilation" BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
5. "For departure time"
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
6. Activate the desired departure time. suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display Safety information
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
WARNING
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can
4. Tap on symbol. cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐
5. Activate the desired departure time. functions, and damage to the system. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
Display not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
The symbol on the automatic climate cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐
control signals an activated departure time. grance cartridge.
Ambient air package Ionization
Concept
Concept
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean pended particles.
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances. Switching on/off
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐ Via iDrive:
pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
grance, ionization contributes to well-being and 1. "My Vehicle"
relaxation while driving. 2. "Vehicle settings"
245
4. If necessary, "Air quality" Switching fragrancing on/off,

5. "Ionization" adjusting intensity
The climate control display indicates that ioniza‐ Via iDrive:
tion is switched on.
1. "My Vehicle"
Fragrancing
General information 4. "Fragrance"
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid 5. "Level"
a habituation effect. 6. Select the desired setting.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances. Display
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove The illustrations on the Control Display show the
compartment. actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐ Via iDrive:
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur
prior to the trip. The system is automatically 1. "My Vehicle"
switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐ 2. "Vehicle settings"
grancing was switched on at the end of the last 3. "Climate functions"
trip.
4. "Fragrance"
Functional requirements The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐

played.
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
out. ing.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
Selecting the fragrance
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. Inserting fragrance cartridges
Via iDrive: The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
1. "My Vehicle" compartment.
2. "Vehicle settings" 1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
3. "Climate functions" page 256.
4. "Fragrance" 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
rently used.
246
The cartridge holder slides down. 5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge.

Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
fragrance cartridge. sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge
snaps lightly into place.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of

the fragrance cartridge. 7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.
Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge

The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 256.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
247
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
248
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features that are not necessarily such as the garage door, may result in pinched
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected body parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of
options or country versions. This also applies to damage to property. Make sure that the area of
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ movement of the respective system is clear
ing these functions and systems, the applicable during programming and operation. Also follow
laws and regulations must be observed. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
Concept
be controlled, the system is generally
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control.
remote-controlled systems, such as garage door
Additional questions are answered by:
drives, barriers or lighting systems.
▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified
General information service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
Corporation.
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage gate
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
249
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
250
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the universal remote control remains
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
nonoperational, continue with the special
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
features for change code wireless sys‐
for the next step.
tems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out. Operation
Reprogramming individual WARNING

buttons The operation of remote-controlled systems
1. Switch on standby state. with the integrated universal remote control,
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be such as the garage door, may result in pinched
programmed. body parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
movement of the respective system is clear
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
during programming and operation. Also follow
lease the button.
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system mitter.
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
The required distance depends on the hand- erated using the button on the interior mirror
held transmitter. while the drive-ready or standby state is
5. Press and hold the button of the desired switched on. To do this, hold down the button
function on the hand-held transmitter. within receiving range of the system until the
Canada: if programming with the hand-held function is activated. The interior mirror LED
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and mitted.
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds. Deleting stored functions
6. The LED can light up in different ways. All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ tions cannot be deleted individually.
ming procedure is completed. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
Release the button. terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly.
251
Sun visor 2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold

the ashtray cover upward.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
Emptying
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the

Ashtray cup holder.
Front center console

Cigarette lighter
Opening
1. Slide the cover forward. Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
252
Sockets
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
Concept
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
socket cover again after using the socket. electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
Front center console General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Slide the cover forward. Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup work with high voltages and currents, which
holders. means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
Operation chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
Push in the cigarette lighter. aid terminals in the engine compartment.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out. NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
253
Front center console In the cargo area
Slide the cover forward. A socket is located on the right side in the cargo
area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 66.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Pull off the cover. In the center armrest
Rear center console
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
A socket is located in the center console. ▷ USB port Type A.
Pull off the cover. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 2.1 A.
254
In the center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
Slide the cover forward.
A USB interface is located in the center console.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type A
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current when equipped with tele‐
phone service: max. 2.1 A.
255
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer
to page 257.
options ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 257.
▷ Storage compartment in the center console,
refer to page 257.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ Center armrest, refer to page 258.
options or country versions. This also applies to ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ sole, refer to page 258.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Safety information Glove compartment

Front passenger side
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
Safety information
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐ WARNING
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices partment can be thrown into the car's interior
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
car's interior. cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to Opening
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 256.
Pull the handle.
256
Storage compartments CONTROLS
The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Compartments in the doors
Closing General information
Fold cover closed. There are storage compartments in the doors.
Locking Safety information

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment. WARNING
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
mote control can be handed over without the glasses, can break in the event of an accident
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
parked by valet parking. can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Driver's side
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
Storage compartment in
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ the center console
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ Opening
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Closing
Slide the cover rearward.
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
257
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartment in cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of

injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
the rear center console force objects into the cup holder. Use light-
weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers.
The rear center console contains one or two Do not transport hot beverages.
storage compartments.
Front
Center armrest
Opening
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages. Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Cup holders Closing

Slide the cover rearward.
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder may
damage the cup holders or thrown into the
car's interior, such as in the event of an acci‐
dent, braking or evasive maneuver. Spilled liq‐
uids can distract from the traffic conditions and
lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the
258
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Rear
WARNING
Safety information Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
NOTICE
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
With an open cup holder, the center armrest weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of from the clothes hooks.
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
General information
Opening The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
1. Fold the center armrest forward.
Closing
Press both covers inward back against each
other.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
259
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
WARNING
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
laws and regulations must be observed. NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
Loading sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
WARNING
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ of occupants and cargo should never exceed
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
hicle.
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
permitted gross weight. 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
WARNING 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices weight may not safely exceed the available
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
260
Cargo area CONTROLS
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in ▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet
Step 4. straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐ straps.
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Load
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Fixed lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, securing cargo.
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear The front lashing eyes are located under covers.
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐ Movable lashing eyes
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net, refer to
page 266, to protect occupants. Make sure To secure the cargo there are additional movable
that objects cannot penetrate the cargo area lashing eyes in the cargo area.
partition net.
261
CONTROLS Cargo area
The lashing eyes may be located underneath the Folding down

cargo floor panel. The lashing eyes can be in‐
serted into the openings in the rails.
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it

engages.
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at Retaining function for the cargo
the new position. floor panel
The cargo floor panel can be hooked onto the
right-hand multi-function hook.
Storage compartments in Without storage compartment package:
the cargo area 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel for‐
ward.
Multi-function hook
General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left or
right side in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
2. Lift the cargo floor panel up until it is over the
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
multi-function hook.
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
262
Cargo area CONTROLS
3. Fold down the multi-function hook, refer to Left side storage compartment
page 262.
4. Lower the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, until it is General information
resting on the multi-function hook, arrow 2. A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Opening
With storage compartment package:
1. Fold down the multi-function hook, refer to

page 262.
Pull the handle.
2. Lift the cargo floor panel.
3. Release the loop from the cargo floor panel.
4. Attach the loop, arrow 1, on the multi-func‐ Storage compartment on the
tion hook, arrow 2. right side
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a storage
compartment is located on the right side.
Opening
Tensioning strap
A tensioning strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Net
Pull the handle.
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
263
CONTROLS Cargo area
Storage compartment below Safety information

cargo floor panel
WARNING
General information
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
There is a storage compartment under the cargo rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
floor panel. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Enlarging the cargo area

WARNING
Concept The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cargo
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
area can be enlarged as follows:
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded down. sure that the child restraint system fits securely
▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into an against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
upright loading position using the cargo set‐ backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
ting. rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
General information If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–
20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
center section can be folded down separately.
WARNING
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down from the rear Once the rear seat backrest has been folded
or from the cargo area. down, the locking bracket protrudes into the
car's interior. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. When the rear seat backrest is folded
down, pay attention to the protruding locking
bracket and keep this area unobstructed.
264
Cargo area CONTROLS
2. Press the button and pull the center section

NOTICE forward.
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Folding down the rear seat

backrest from the rear
Cargo position
General information
The rear seat backrests can be moved into an
upright loading position individually. An adjust‐
ment in several tilt stages is possible as needed.
The backrest tilt for the center section is ad‐
justed together with the left backrest.
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest for‐
ward. Settings
1. Pull the lever and hold it there.
Folding down the rear seat
backrest from the cargo area
2. Adjust the tilt of the rear seat backrest if re‐

quired.
Pull the lever inside the cargo area.
Left lever: the left and center rear seat backrests
fold forward.
Right lever: the right rear seat backrest folds for‐
ward.
Fold down the center section

1. Fold down the center head restraint.
265
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo cover Removing

The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
Safety information
WARNING
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the
car's interior.
cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2.
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
compartment under the cargo floor panel.
WARNING
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam
body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of Installing
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two
the cargo cover snap back into place. side brackets. Make sure that the cover audibly
engages on both sides.
NOTICE
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can cause
Cargo area partition net
damage. There is a risk of damage to property.
Hook the cargo cover on both sides. General information
The cargo area partition net can be installed in
two different positions in the vehicle.
Closing
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both

sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
266
Cargo area CONTROLS
With the rear seat backrest With the rear seat backrest
folded down upright
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to 1. Remove the cargo cover, refer to page 266.
page 264. 2. Open the rear lids up on the roof frame until
2. Open the front lids up on the roof frame until they engage.
they engage.
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of

3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐
the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐ cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and
cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and push them forward.
push them forward.
4. Attach the cargo area partition net with the

4. Attach the cargo area partition net with the upper two hooks into the two eyes on the
lower two hooks into the two eyes on the rear seat backrest, arrows 2.
folded-down rear seat backrest, arrows 2.
You may need to lift the rear seat backrests
slightly in order to do this. Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove
the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
267
268
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 270
Trailer towing ........................................................................................... 275
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 279
269
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features that are not necessarily speed:
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
options or country versions. This also applies to 100 mph/160 km/h.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and
ing these functions and systems, the applicable 93 mph/150 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ces.
Breaking-in period
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
General information
increased.
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
Tires
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
refer to page 136. time.
Drive conservatively for the first
Safety information 200 miles/300 km.
WARNING Brake system

Due to new parts and components, safety and Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐ Drive moderately during this break-in period.
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary. Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
spective parts and components. ponents mentioned above are replaced.
270
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Driving on poor roads After a trip on poor roads

After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
Concept
heavy soiling from the body.
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities. General driving notes
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐
mentum.
Closing the tailgate
Safety information Safety information
NOTICE WARNING
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
unpaved terrain. an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
When driving on poor roads to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before Driving with the tailgate open
driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
▷ Do not take risks when driving. avoided:
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
surface, the slower the speed should be. ▷ Drive moderately.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near Hot exhaust gas system
the MAX mark.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
WARNING
Control HDC.
During driving operation, high temperatures can
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
tact with the ground.
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐ ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐ contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
hicle's load. tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
accelerator so that driving stability control remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
systems can distribute the driving force to the ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ combustible materials can come in contact with
trol if available. hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
271
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust Hydroplaning

gas system.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
Exhaust gas particulate filter This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
Concept contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot
brake the vehicle.
particles. The soot particles are burned at high
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu‐
late filter as necessary.
Driving through water
General information General information

When driving through water, follow the following:
During several minutes of cleaning the following
may occur: ▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
smoothly. than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
sary to reach usual performance. speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷ A slight amount of smoke coming from the
exhaust system, even after the engine is Safety information
switched off.
▷ Noises, such as those caused by the radiator NOTICE
fan running, even several minutes after the When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
engine is switched off. ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
After-running of the radiator fan for several mi‐ ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
nutes is normal even after short trips. There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Mobile communication devices mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water.
in the vehicle
WARNING Braking safely

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to General information
the transmission operations of mobile phones. The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to System ABS as a standard feature.
property. If possible, in the car's interior use Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
only mobile phones with direct connections to quire such.
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
car's interior. obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
272
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the You can increase the engine's braking effect by
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
System ABS is in its active mode. needed.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐ Safety information
tional noises have no effect on the performance
and operational reliability of the brake. WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
Objects in the area around the high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
pedals possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
WARNING brake system.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in WARNING
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ In idle state or with the engine switched off,
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can braking effect, braking force boost and steering
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use assistance, are restricted or not available at all.
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ idle state or with the engine switched off.
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning. Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
Driving in wet conditions circumstances:
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
▷ Low mileage.
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
used at all.
traffic.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
corrosion. agents.
In this way braking efficiency will be available Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
when you need it. pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Hills
Condensation water under the
General information parked vehicle
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear When using the automatic climate control, con‐
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the densation water develops and collects under‐
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐ neath the vehicle.
ciency.
273
Roof-mounted luggage Driving on racetracks

rack Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
General information wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
Installation only possible with roof rack. is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
274
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer
options load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in
each case.
cific and optional features offered with the series. Tire inflation pressure
Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle and
trailer.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for
ing these functions and systems, the applicable higher loads applies.
laws and regulations must be observed. Information regarding the tire inflation pressure,
refer to page 296.
For the trailer, the specifications of the manufac‐
General information turer apply.
The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, drawbar

Flat Tire Monitor FTM
node weights, and the permissible gross vehicle
weight are specified in the technical data. After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the Flat Tire
The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐
Monitor, refer to page 317.
pension system on the rear axle and, depending
on the vehicle type, with a more powerful cooling
system. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire Pres‐
Before driving sure Monitor, refer to page 310.
Drawbar nose weight Exterior mirrors

The maximum load of the tractor is lowered by Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see
the weight of the trailer hitch and the drawbar both rear corners of the trailer, are available as
nose weight. The drawbar nose weight increases special accessories from a dealer’s service cen‐
the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the approved ter or another qualified service center or repair
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle. shop.
Loading Power consumption

Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the
General information
cargo area.
Before starting to drive, check the function of the
Stow the load as low and close to the trailer axle
trailer tail lights.
as possible. A low center of gravity in the trailer
increases the driving safety of the entire vehicle-
trailer combination.
275
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐

tems/power consumers short when towing a WARNING
camper to save the vehicle battery power. The tire inflation pressure must be adjusted to
the increased axle load in trailer towing. Driving
Trailer tail lights with too low tire inflation pressure can damage
▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per side. the tires. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total. damage to property. Do not exceed a speed
of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase the tire inflation
▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total.
pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note
the maximum possible tire inflation pressure in‐
dicated on the tire.
Towing a trailer
General information Uphill grades
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance General information
systems may have functional limitations or may In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering
malfunction. the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers is
To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing, permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %.
refer to page 277. If higher trailer loads are approved at a later point
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing in time, the gradient limit is 8 %.
is activated, some driver assistance systems are
unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A Starting on uphill grades
Check Control message is displayed where ap‐ The parking brake is Automatically released
plicable. when the accelerator pedal is activated.
In order to prevent rolling back during starting,
Safety information use the parking brake.
WARNING 1. Pull and release switch before starting

Depending on the design and loading of trail‐ off.
ers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐ The parking brake is set.
ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There is a 2. Accelerated enough to start off.
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer. Hills
Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐
A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency to
ply necessary steering corrections as carefully
swing more readily on hills.
as possible.
Manually shift down to the next lower gear be‐
fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly.
276
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
High loads and external ▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts, be‐
temperatures fore swinging is detected.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated or has malfunctioned.
NOTICE
On long trips with heavy trailer loads, high ex‐
ternal temperatures and low tank content, the Activating trailer towing
fuel system can overheat, which reduces the
engine performance. There is a risk of damage
to property. Refuel promptly. On long trips with
Concept
heavy trailer loads and high external tempera‐ When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the
tures, ensure that the fuel tank is more than trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance
1/4 full. systems may have functional limitations or may
malfunction. To prevent malfunctions, activate
trailer towing.
Trailer stabilization control Activating trailer towing

Via iDrive:
Concept
1. "My Vehicle"
This system supports the driver in stopping the
swinging of a trailer.
3. "Trailer mode"
The trailer stabilization control detects swinging
and automatically brakes the vehicle quickly to 4. Activate trailer towing.
leave the critical speed range and stabilize the
vehicle-trailer combination.
Mount for trailer hitch
General information
If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer General information
has not been hitched, the system can become
active in certain driving situations, such as when
using a bicycle rack with lighting.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is being
towed and the trailer power socket is in use.
System limits The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the
The system cannot intervene or not intervene in rear of the vehicle.
time in the following situations, for instance: Information on suitable trailer hitches is found on
▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance on the underside of the mount, see arrow.
slippery roads or loose surfaces. Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to
page 354.
277
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Safety information Fittings for trailer safety chain
WARNING
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. Contact
with the hot components can cause burns.
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot com‐
ponents. Do not perform work in the vicinity of
hot components until after they have cooled
down. There are two fittings on the mount for the trailer
hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
Removing the cover Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for
increased safety when driving with a trailer.
Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move
freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a Brake Controller installed by a dealer’s
Pull the cover out of the back of the mount, and or repair shop.
stow it in the vehicle.
Information on installing a Brake Controller can
be obtained from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Trailer connector other qualified service center or repair shop.
The socket is located to the left of the mount for

the trailer hitch.
278
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel
cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Tires
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ General information
ing these functions and systems, the applicable Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
laws and regulations must be observed. instance tire size may influence consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure

Reducing fuel consumption regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
General information pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for ing on a long trip.
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
ues. sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ tire wear.
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ Drive away without delay
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
impact. away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
Remove unnecessary cargo gine up to operating temperature.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Look well ahead when driving
Remove attached parts following Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
use consumption.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
lowing use. driving ahead of you.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
namics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
279
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Have maintenance carried out
cator, refer to page 147.
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
Use coasting conditions recommends that maintenance work be per‐
When approaching a red light, take your foot off formed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ tem, refer to page 334.
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during
longer stops Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
Switching off the engine consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in control output, are adjusted.
traffic congestion. Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions
the engine is automatically decoupled from the
Auto Start/Stop function transmission in the D selector lever position. The
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling
matically switches off the engine during a stop. to reduce consumption. The D selector lever po‐
sition remains engaged.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds driving style.
of switching off the engine. The achieved extended range is displayed in the
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined instrument cluster as bonus range.
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors. General information
The system includes the following
Switch off any functions that are EfficientDynamics functions and
not currently needed EfficientDynamics displays:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 282.
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 281.
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 283.
stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 284.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
280
Overview ▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"

▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
Button
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
Activating ECO PRO "Tip at:"
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed Select the desired speed.
Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
Configuring ECO PRO
engine and coasting with the engine idling.
INDIVIDUAL
Deactivate the function to use the braking effect
of the engine when traveling downhill.
Opening via the Driving Dynamics
Control
ECO PRO seat climate control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
is activated.
Opening via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle" ECO PRO climate control
2. "Vehicle settings" Climate control is set to be efficient.
3. "Driving Experience Control" That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐
rior more slowly, to economize on consumption.
The mirror heating is made available when exter‐
nal temperatures are very cold.
rently used.
ECO PRO Sight
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
functions
window defroster is reduced.
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
Resetting the settings
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
▷ "Coasting" settings:
281
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD" Instrument cluster with enhanced features
General information
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the display
ECO PRO bonus range

Information about the current driving style
A modified driving style helps you
A pointer in the consumption display informs
extend your driving range.
about the current driving style:
The range extension can be dis‐
▷ The current consumption in relation to the
played as the bonus range in the
average consumption is displayed.
instrument cluster.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐
Depending on the equipment, the blue bar seg‐ ing.
ments symbolize the gained range in stages.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current accelerating.
driving style is inefficient.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions the average consumption and the current con‐
for efficient driving are met. sumption is colored red.
The bonus range is automatically reset every In addition, the following information is displayed,
time the vehicle is refueled. depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
Consumption display tance driven while coasting, refer to
page 284.
Instrument cluster without enhanced ▷ The total time that the engine has been
features switched off, refer to page 122, during auto‐
matic engine stops.
▷ A gear shift indicator, refer to page 147, rec‐
ommending the use of a more efficient gear.
Indications on the Control

Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO functions
can be displayed on the Control Display.
282
Via iDrive:
Coasting
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action" Concept
3. "EfficientDynamics" Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
4. Select the symbol. cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
The following functions are displayed:
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐
▷ Energy recovery. gaged.
▷ Coasting. This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
Displaying consumption history pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
The following functions can be shown on the
Control Display: General information
▷ Average consumption. Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
▷ The distance traveled while coasting. ing mode.
▷ The duration for which the Auto Start/Stop Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
function has switched off the engine. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Via iDrive:
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
1. "My Vehicle" the function often and supports the efficient ef‐
2. "Technology in action" fect of coasting.
3. "EfficientDynamics"
Vertical bars show consumption for the selected The function is available in the speed range from
route. approximately 30 mph/50 km/h to
100 mph/160 km/h when the following condi‐
tions are met:
Selecting route length
▷ Accelerator pedal not depressed.
Via iDrive:
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
depressed.
1. Press button.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
2. "Scaling:"
D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Resetting consumption history
Via iDrive: Operation via shift paddles
1. Press button. Concept

2. "Reset consumption history" The coasting driving condition can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
283
Activating/deactivating coasting via

shift paddles
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display Color code blue: coasting mode.
Instrument cluster without

Display EfficientDynamics
enhanced features
information
The mark in the consumption dis‐ Via iDrive:
play below the tachometer is lo‐
cated at the zero point and is 1. "My Vehicle"
backlit in blue. The tachometer 2. "Technology in action"
approximately indicates idle
3. "EfficientDynamics"
speed.
System limits
Instrument cluster with enhanced The function is not available under one of the fol‐
features lowing conditions.
The mark in the consumption dis‐ ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
play is located at the zero point ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
and is backlit in blue. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or
vehicle electrical system drawing excessive
The distance traveled is indicated in coast‐
current.
ing mode.
▷ Trailer towing.
The coasting mode is displayed in Driving style analysis
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown
Concept
in the consumption history. The counter is reset
with every refueling. The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
284
General information If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
The current trip is assessed.
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
The display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐

sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup
table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient the driving style, the
smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐
cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table, arrow 2, and the faster the
bonus range increases.
285
286
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 288
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 290
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 296
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 325
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 328
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 332
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 334
Replacing components .......................................................................... 336
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 344
Care ........................................................................................................... 351
287
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and Fuel cap
options
Opening
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
cific and optional features offered with the series. flap.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
page 290, prior to refueling.
In vehicles with a diesel engine, the filler neck is
designed for refueling at diesel fuel pumps.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ the fuel filler flap.
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
288
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
WARNING NOTICE
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, e.g. with an elec‐
trical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Follow the following when

refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
289
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected stalling, especially under certain environmental
options or country versions. This also applies to conditions such as high ambient temperature
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ and high altitude, may occur.
ing these functions and systems, the applicable If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
laws and regulations must be observed. ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Fuel recommendation gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
General information Failure to comply with these recommendations
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
fuel that has been customized to winter or nance.
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
NOTICE
Gasoline Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
General information tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should converter is permanently damaged. There is a
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Leaded gasoline.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. or iron.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
dards: ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
US: ASTM 4806–xx
repair shop.
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
290
Fuel MOBILITY
▷ Do not use gasoline.

NOTICE ▷ The vehicle manufacturer recommends
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and only using diesel additives which have
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ been classified as suitable.
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to ice center or another qualified service center or
M100. repair shop.
NOTICE Low-Sulfur Diesel

Fuel that does not comply with the minimum The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
quality can compromise engine function or with low sulfur content:
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does xx: comply with the current standard in each
not comply with the minimum quality. case.
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
Recommended fuel grade The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not ex‐
BMW recommends AKI 91. ceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gaso‐
line. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel, for
instance gasoline, do not start the engine as this
Minimum fuel grade
may damage the engine.
BMW recommends AKI 89.
In the case of incorrect refueling, contact a deal‐
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, er’s service center or another qualified service
the engine may produce knocking sounds when center or repair shop or Roadside Assistance.
starting at high external temperatures. This has
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
no effect on the engine life.
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
Diesel equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel can‐
Safety information
not be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for in‐
NOTICE structions on how to add fuel. For more informa‐
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or tion on Roadside Assistance, refer to page 345.
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. There is a risk of damage to
property.
Follow the following for diesel engines:
▷ Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
▷ Do not refuel with pure methyl ester.
▷ Only refuel with biodiesel with a maximum
of B5/5 % according to ASTM D975.
291
MOBILITY Fuel
BMW Advanced Diesel sible to activate the drive-ready state again after
switching off.
▷ Light white: refill with diesel
Concept
exhaust fluid at the next op‐
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides portunity.
in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel ex‐
▷ Light yellow: not enough die‐
haust fluid into the exhaust system. A chemical
sel exhaust fluid present. The
reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter
remaining range is displayed
that minimizes nitrogen oxides.
in the instrument cluster. Im‐
mediately refill with Diesel ex‐
General information haust fluid, refer to page 293.
The vehicle has a tank that must be refilled.
To be able to establish the drive-ready state as
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
usual, there must be an adequate amount of die‐
sel exhaust fluid. The remaining range is displayed
in the instrument cluster. Add at
Diesel exhaust fluid can be refilled at any time.
least 2.7 US gal/10 liters of diesel
Diesel exhaust fluid is available at many gas sta‐ exhaust fluid. The engine will con‐
tions. tinue to run as long as it is not
If possible, refill diesel exhaust fluid using a fuel switched off and all other operating conditions
pump, refer to page 293. are satisfied; sufficient fuel, for instance.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low System malfunction

temperatures A Check Control message is displayed when
Due to its physical properties, it is possible that there is a system not working.
the diesel exhaust fluid may need to be replen‐
Visit the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
ished more frequently if exposed to tempera‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
tures under +23 ℉/-5 ℃.
At temperatures below +12 ℉/-11 ℃, it may Have the diesel exhaust fluid
only be possible to measure and display the fill‐
ing level after a short drive.
replenished
BMW recommends that diesel exhaust fluid be
At low temperatures, add diesel exhaust fluid
added by the dealer’s service center within the
only immediately before driving off.
course of regular maintenance.
Displays in the instrument In addition, it may be necessary to have the fluid

replenished several times between maintenance
cluster appointments under particular circumstances, for
instance if the vehicle is driven in a particularly
Reserve level indicator sporty style or if it is operated with a trailer.
The reserve level indicator in the instrument The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished as
cluster provides information about the distance soon as the reserve level indicator appears in the
that can still be driven with the current reserve instrument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐
level. establish the drive-ready state.
Do not continue driving to the limit of the remain‐
ing travel distance, otherwise it may not be pos‐
292
Fuel MOBILITY
Replenishing diesel exhaust fluid exhaust fluid can be replenished simply and
yourself in exceptional cases safely.
▷ Alternatively recommended: NOx Diesel ex‐
General information haust fluid AUS 32.
You can replenish Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at a deal‐
exceptional cases, for instance to get to your er’s service center or another qualified service
scheduled service. center or repair shop.
Safety information Refill quantity

When the reserve level indicator starts, add at
least 1.3 US gal/5 liters.
WARNING
Small amounts of ammonia fumes can escape Tank for diesel exhaust fluid
when opening the diesel exhaust fluid con‐
tainer. Ammonia fumes have a pungent odor
and irritate skin, mucous membranes, and eyes.
There is a risk of injury. Do not inhale escaping
ammonia fumes. Avoid the contact of articles of
clothing, skin or eyes with diesel exhaust fluid.
Do not swallow any diesel exhaust fluid. Keep
children away from diesel exhaust fluids.
WARNING The fuel cap for diesel exhaust fluids is next to

the fuel cap for the fuel tank.
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ Adding diesel exhaust fluid at the
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid fuel pump
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating General information
materials into different bottles. Store operating
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
NOTICE
▷ Overflow of diesel exhaust fluid.
The diesel exhaust fluid ingredients are very
aggressive. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ The tank for diesel exhaust fluid is full when the
erty. Avoid contact of diesel exhaust fluid with filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
surfaces of the vehicle. Depending on the filling nozzle, it may not be
possible to fill the tank for the diesel exhaust fluid
completely.
Suitable diesel exhaust fluid Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
▷ Recommended: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. tion.
With this bottle and its special adapter, diesel
293
MOBILITY Fuel
Adding diesel exhaust fluid Adding diesel exhaust fluid using a

1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 288. bottle
2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid 1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 288.
tank counterclockwise and remove. 2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid
tank counterclockwise and remove.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
4. Place the bottle on it and turn it clockwise as

far as it will go.
4. Using the fuel pump nozzle, add at least the

recommended refilling quantity, refer to
page 293.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle 5. Press the bottle down.
clicks off the first time.
The vehicle tank will be filled.
The tank is full when the fill level in the bottle
no longer changes. It is not possible to over‐
fill.
5. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.

294
Fuel MOBILITY
6. Pull back the bottle and unscrew it. Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
After filling, the indicator is still
displayed.
The drive-ready state can only be
established after the indicator
goes out.
1. Press the Start/Stop button three times.

The indicator goes out after approx. 1 minute.
2. Press the Start/Stop button and establish the
7. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise. drive-ready state.
Disposing of bottles
Filling with an incorrect fluid Have bottles for diesel exhaust fluid dis‐
posed of by a dealer's service center or
General information another qualified service center or repair
A Check Control message is displayed when an shop or take them to a collection point.
incorrect fluid is added. Do not dispose of empty bottles with household
In the case that an incorrect fluid was refilled, waste unless this is permitted by local regula‐
contact a dealer’s service center or another tions.
Safety information
WARNING
After adding an incorrect fluid, for instance anti‐
freeze for washer fluid, the system can heat
and ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do
not add incorrect fluids. Do not start the engine
after adding an incorrect fluid.
After filling diesel exhaust fluid
Reserve level indicator

The reserve level indicator will still
appear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
The drive-ready state can be es‐
tablished.
After several minutes of driving, the reserve level
indicator goes out.
295
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features that are not necessarily page 298, contains all tire inflation pressure
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
options or country versions. This also applies to ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
laws and regulations must be observed. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
General information On the Control Display

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure The current tire inflation pressure values and the
influence the following: intended tire inflation pressure values for the
▷ The service life of the tires. mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
▷ Road safety. Display.
▷ Driving comfort. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the

tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
▷ Fuel consumption.
have been set, refer to page 310, for the
mounted tires.
Safety information
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated on each tire.
WARNING The intended tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
may heat up significantly and sustain damage.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of Checking the tire inflation
handling, such as steering and braking re‐ pressure
sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
General information
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐
fore a long trip. Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
296
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation After correcting the tire inflation

pressure specifications in the tire pressure
inflation pressure table With runflat tires:
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
Pressure Monitor TPM.
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not Tire inflation pressures up to
been exceeded.
100 mph/160 km/h
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
2 hours after a trip.
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐ ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐ page 298, and adjust as necessary.
rect it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 296, the intended

tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed These pressure values can also be found on the
onto the tire valves. tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Checking using the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
pressure specifications on the
Control Display
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the intended value.
297
Tire inflation pressure values up X3 M40i

to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
X3 xDrive30i, X3 sDrive30i, X3 tions in bar/PSI
xDrive30d Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tires
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in 245/50 R 19 105 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

bar/PSI with cold H M+S XL A/S
tires Std/RSC
245/50 R 19 105
225/60 R 18 104 H 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36 W XL RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC 245/50 R 19 105 V
225/60 R 18 104 H M+S XL RSC
M+S XL RSC Front: 245/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 -
245/50 R 19 105 H 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 103 W XL RSC
M+S XL A/S Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.4 / 35
Std/RSC 106 W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105
W XL RSC Front: 245/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 -
103 Y XL Std
245/50 R 19 105 V
M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.4 / 35
106 Y XL Std
Front: 245/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 -
103 W XL RSC Front: 245/40 R 21 2.3 / 33 -
100 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.4 / 35
106 W XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 21 - 2.6 / 38
103 Y XL RSC
Front: 245/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 -
103 Y XL Std Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.4 / 35 T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h

106 Y XL Std M 4.2 / 60
Front: 245/40 R 21 2.3 / 33 -

100 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 275/35 R 21 - 2.6 / 38
103 Y XL RSC
WARNING
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
M 4.2 / 60 necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
298
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire Tire size Pressure specifica‐
damage and accidents could occur. tions in bar/PSI
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ Front: 245/40 R 21 2.6 / 38 -
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in 100 Y XL RSC
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to Rear: 275/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
page 299, and adjust as necessary. 103 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressure values Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h
over 100 mph/160 km/h T 135/80 R 18 104
M 4.2 / 60
X3 xDrive30i, X3 sDrive30i, X3
xDrive30d X3 M40i
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
225/60 R 18 104 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 245/50 R 19 105 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

M+S XL A/S RSC H M+S XL A/S
225/60 R 18 104 H Std/RSC
M+S XL RSC 245/50 R 19 105
245/50 R 19 105 H W XL RSC
M+S XL A/S 245/50 R 19 105 V
Std/RSC M+S XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105 W Front: 245/45 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
XL RSC 103 W XL RSC
245/50 R 19 105 V
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 3.1 / 45
M+S XL RSC
106 W XL RSC
Front: 245/45 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
Front: 245/45 R 20 2.4 / 35 -
103 W XL RSC
103 Y XL Std
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 3.1 / 45
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
106 W XL RSC
106 Y XL Std
Front: 245/45 R 20 2.4 / 35 -
Front: 245/40 R 21 2.6 / 38 -
103 Y XL Std
100 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
106 Y XL Std
299
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

tions in bar/PSI
Tire Identification Number
Rear: 275/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3818
103 Y XL RSC
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
xxx: tire size and tire design
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
3818: tire age
M 4.2 / 60
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire identification marks
Tire age
Tire size Recommendation
245/45 R 18 96 Y
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
245: nominal width in mm every 6 years.
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code Manufacture date
18: rim diameter in inches You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
the tire's sidewall.
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 3818 38th week, 2018

Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible Uniform Tire Quality Grading
weight for which the tire is approved.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on maximum section width.
the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
A
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively. DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Speed letter Traction AA A B C
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h Temperature A B C
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
Treadwear
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
300
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 tire failure.
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon RSC – Run-flat tires
the actual conditions of their use, however, and Run-flat tires, refer to page 304, are labeled with
may depart significantly from the norm due to a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
variations in driving habits, service practices and marked on the sidewall.
differences in road characteristics and climate.
M+S
Traction
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are weather performance than summer tires.
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled Tire tread
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
Summer tires
have poor traction performance.
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
risk of hydroplaning.
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Winter tires
Temperature Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
winter operation.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
Minimum tread depth
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required min‐
WARNING imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ The positions of the wear indicators are marked
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or tor.
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
301
Tire damage transported as needed. Do not repair damaged

tires, but have them replaced.
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign WARNING
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ slowly and carefully.
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions: Changing wheels and tires
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
to pull to the left or right.
service center or repair shop.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
Wheel and tire combination
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage. General information
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
▷ Vehicle overloading. other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
pected while driving, immediately reduce speed
erances despite the same official size rating.
and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
302
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in

WARNING time.
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical Drive conservatively for the first
problems, for instance independent loosening 200 miles/300 km.
of the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not mount Retreaded tires
steel wheels.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
WARNING
structures. With advanced age the service life
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
on the function of a variety of systems, such as ommend the use of retreaded tires.
the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control. There is a risk of an accident. To The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
maintain good handling and vehicle response, ommend the use of retreaded tires.
use only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer
of the vehicle recommends that you use
Winter tires
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle General information
type. Following tire damage, have the original Winter tires are recommended for operating on
wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐ winter roads.
cle as soon as possible. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
Recommended tire brands ance as winter tires.
Safety information
WARNING
If the vehicle is equipped with an M Sport dif‐
ferential and all-weather tires on 19 inch rims,
this can alter handling, for instance the vehicle
may swerve off course. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. If the vehi‐
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle is equipped with an M Sport differential, do
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire not fit all-weather tires on 19 inch rims.
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
Maximum speed of winter tires
New tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
303
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐

able from a dealer’s service center or another
Run-flat tires
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
Concept
exceed the permissible maximum speed. Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
Changing runflat tires plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
For your own safety, use only runflat tires. No

spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Fur‐
General information
ther information is available from a dealer’s serv‐ The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
ice center or another qualified service center or ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
repair shop. rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
Rotating wheels between axles main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
Different wear patterns can occur on the front of a tire inflation pressure loss.
and rear axles depending on individual driving Follow the instructions for continued driving with
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ a flat tire.
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐ Safety information
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct, if needed. WARNING
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehicles Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
and rear axles. your lane stability when braking is reduced,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
Storing tires
accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
WARNING
Storage Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐

ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not
place.
exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
grease, and solvents. brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary
Do not leave tires in plastic bags. steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
304
Label General information

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
RSC Run-flat System Component. have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
tire.
Repairing a flat tire ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
Safety measures ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐
passing traffic and on solid ground. tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐
portunity.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by tire inflation pressure.
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels Overview
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Storage
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The Mobility System is located in the compart‐
Concept ment under the cargo floor panel.
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can Fold up the cargo floor panel.
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
305
Sealant container ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling the tire with sealant

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Safety information
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
DANGER
Compressor
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
1 Sealant container unlocking NOTICE

2 Sealant container holder The compressor can overheat during extended
3 Tire pressure gage operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
10 minutes.
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket Filling
8 Connection hose 1. Shake the sealant container.
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
306
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on 6. With standby state switched on or the engine
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ running, switch on the compressor.
gages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
307
Removing and stowing the sealant center or another qualified service center or
container repair shop.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
tainer from the tire valve. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
pressor.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
inside the vehicle.
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket
reached
inside the vehicle. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
side the vehicle.
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With standby state switched on or the engine

running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
not be reached, contact your dealer’s service
308
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐

side the vehicle.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
2.0 bar. snow chains.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor. WARNING
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
button on the compressor. tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ accidents or risk of damage to property. Make
pressor from the tire valve. sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐
ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Fine-link snow chains
Continuing the trip The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
of 50 mph/80 km/h. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 317. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 310. Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/60 R 18.
▷ 245/50 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
309
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting Safety information

snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect
readings.
WARNING
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ The display of the target pressures is not a
sult in incorrect readings. substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
forward momentum.
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of
Maximum speed with snow injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
chains that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when played correctly and match the details on the
using snow chains. tires and on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the
Concept system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if ▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires. correct details on the mounted tires must be
entered in the tire settings, refer to
page 310.
General information
▷ For tires with special approval:
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and tire temperature. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
tion pressure.
automatically display the specified target pres‐
sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
flation pressures. justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
If tires are being used that are not specified on
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, ▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
refer to page 296, such as tires with special ap‐
proval, the system needs to be actively reset. Tire settings
The system will then take over the actual tire in‐
flation pressures as the target pressures. General information
When operating the system, also note the addi‐ The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐
tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐ ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the
sure, refer to page 296, chapter. vehicle, refer to page 296, or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
310
placement, the settings of the tire sets used last Current tire inflation pressure
can be selected. The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for
each tire.
Opening the menu
The current tire inflation pressures may change
Via iDrive: during driving operation or depending on the ex‐
1. "My Vehicle" ternal temperature.
2. "Vehicle status"
Current tire temperature
Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
Changing settings
The current tire temperatures may change while
Via iDrive:
driving or due to the external temperature.
1. "Tire settings"
2. Selecting tires: Target pressure
▷ "Summer tires" The target pressure for the tires on the front and
rear axles is displayed.
▷ "Winter tires/all-season tires"
The target pressures are values stored in the ve‐
3. "Current:"
hicle.
4. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
The specified target pressures take the influence
rear axle:
of driving operation and external temperature on
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y. the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐
▷ For tires with special approval: "Other tire" ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐
5. Select the maximum road speed that will be pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐
used with the tires. tures and driving times.
6. "Confirm settings" The displayed target pressure may change and

may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
The measurement of the current tire inflation on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐
pressure is started. The measurement progress flation pressure can thus be corrected to the
is displayed. value of the displayed target pressures.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if
Status display the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
Current status
Tire conditions
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ General information
tive.
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
Via iDrive: of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
1. "My Vehicle" Control Display.
2. "Vehicle status" Any existing messages are not deleted if the dis‐
played target pressure is not reached after the
tire inflation pressure is corrected.
The current status is displayed.
311
All wheels green the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor

▷ The system is active and bases warnings on active. See label for recommended pressures.".
the displayed target pressures. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is continue the reset resumes automatically.
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation
pressures stored during the last reset. Messages: for tires without
special approval
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐ General information
sure has occurred in the indicated tires. A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation Safety information
pressure losses.
Possible causes: WARNING
▷ Malfunction. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
after confirmation of the tire settings. steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
being reset.
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
For tires with special approval: with these tires.
performing a reset
Via iDrive:
If a tire inflation pressure check is
1. "My Vehicle" required
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Message
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
off. pears on the Control Display.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset". Symbol Possible cause

6. Drive away. Inflation was not carried out accord‐
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ ing to specifications, e.g., when the
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure tire has not been sufficiently inflated
Monitor…". or in the case of a natural steady tire
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a pressure loss.
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as the target tire inflation pressures. Measure
The reset is completed automatically while driv‐ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
ing.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
312
If the tire inflation pressure is too Run-flat tires, refer to page 304, are labeled
low with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
Messages: for tires with special
the instrument cluster. approval
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ General information

sage appears on the Control Display. A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Symbol Possible cause Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
There is a tire inflation pressure loss. Safety information
WARNING
Measure A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
four tires and correct if necessary. cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
If there is a significant loss of tire with these tires.
inflation pressure
If a tire inflation pressure check is
Message
required
the instrument cluster. Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
313
Sym‐ Possible cause 3. Reset the system.

bol
If there is a significant loss of tire
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ inflation pressure
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated. Message
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
the instrument cluster.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset. In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
No reset was performed for the sys‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
tem. The system issues a warning trol Display.
based on the tire inflation pressures Symbol Possible cause
stored during the last reset.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Measure tire inflation pressure.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as No reset was performed for the sys‐
needed. tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
2. Perform a system reset. stored during the last reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too

Measure
low
Message Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 304, are labeled
sage appears on the Control Display. with a circular symbol containing the letters
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss. Actions in the event of a flat tire
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning Normal tires
based on the tire inflation pressures 1. Identify the damaged tire.
stored during the last reset.
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
Measure of a flat tire kit.
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas TPM may not have been reset. In this case,
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all perform the reset.
four tires and correct if necessary.
314
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
dealer’s service center or another qualified tires at the next opportunity.
service center or repair shop. For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
changing the wheel. Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, set. In this case, perform the reset.
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportunity. Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
Run-flat tires The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
Safety information is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
WARNING ing style is used.
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
your lane stability when braking is reduced, tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ to 50 miles/80 km.
accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a Vehicle handling with damaged tires
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
WARNING
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
▷ Longer braking distances.
ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐ Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary curbs or potholes.
steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Maximum speed
cate the final failure of a tire.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Continued driving with a flat tire Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
Follow the following when continuing to drive
repair shop.
with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
315
System limits ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leaving
Temperature the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
system reset again.
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
tion pressure.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
tire temperature falls again.
Monitoring System
These circumstances may cause a warning
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
when temperatures fall very sharply.
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
play again after a short distance. flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
Sudden tire pressure loss hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
damage caused by external circumstances. sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
Failure to perform a reset sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
Tires with special approval: the system will not
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
for example a flat tire may be indicated although
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
the tire inflation pressures are correct.
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
Malfunction tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
Message ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
The yellow warning light flashes and is cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
then illuminated continuously. A Check that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Control message is displayed. It may not maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
be possible to identify tire pressure losses. to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Measure Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
mounted: have the wheels checked, if system is not operating properly. The TPMS
needed. malfunction indicator is combined with the low
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, such tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
the wheels checked, if needed. mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked. subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
316
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is 2. "Vehicle status"

illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
The status is displayed.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Initialization required
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after ing situations:
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate justed.
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
function properly.
Performing initialization
FTM Flat Tire Monitor When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
Concept
inflation pressures.
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
Do not initialize the system when driving with
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
snow chains.
tween the individual wheels while driving.
Via iDrive:
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of 1. "My Vehicle"
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires. 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
Functional requirements 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following conditions must be met for the 6. Drive away.
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of The initialization is completed while driving,
tire inflation pressure is not assured: which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ The initialization automatically continues when
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ driving resumes.
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted Messages
to a new value, an initialization was per‐
formed. General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
Status display bility Control is switched on, if needed.
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
317
Safety information If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
WARNING tem.
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires or another qualified service center or repair
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of shop.
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐ 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving changing the wheel.
with these tires.
Run-flat tires
Indication of a flat tire Safety information

the instrument cluster. WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
sage appears on the Control Display. your lane stability when braking is reduced,
Symbol Possible cause braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
tire inflation pressure. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Measure
WARNING
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
vers. ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not
exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐
ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
Run-flat tires, refer to page 304, are labeled brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary
with a circular symbol containing the letters steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
Normal tires speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐
sure gage of a flat tire kit.
318
Continued driving with a flat tire Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
Follow the following when continuing to drive ice center or another qualified service center or
with a damaged tire: repair shop.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ System limits

vers.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. the following situations:
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
tires at the next opportunity. all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
tem. advance.
Possible driving range with a ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
depressurized tire ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
The distance for which it may be possible to face.
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
external temperature. The driving range may be ▷ When driving with snow chains.
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Changing wheels/tires
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up General information
to 50 miles/80 km.
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
Vehicle handling with damaged tires does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle due to a flat tire.
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following: If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. center or another qualified service center or re‐
▷ Longer braking distances. pair shop.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering Safety information
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes. DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
Final tire failure
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
cate the final failure of a tire. of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
319
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the

vehicle and do not start the engine. WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
DANGER be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle risk of damage to property. When cranking up
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ jacking point next to the wheel housing.
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack. WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
WARNING There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
provided in order to perform a wheel change in ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
signed for frequent use; for example, changing a dealer’s service center or another qualified
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ service center or repair shop.
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach Securing the vehicle against
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a rolling
breakdown.
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
WARNING tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example when changing a wheel.
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, On a level surface
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
wheel to be changed.
320
On a slight downhill gradient 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ ing on the lug bolt.
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of Preparing the vehicle
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
direction.
at a safe distance from traffic.
Lug bolt lock ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
Concept
position P.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
which matches the coding.
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
Overview guardrail.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
321
Jacking points for the vehicle Jacking up the vehicle

jack
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ your other hand, arrow 2.
cated at the indicated positions.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
322
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle Mounting a wheel

jack crank or lever clockwise.
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or tern.
lever with one hand.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
vertically and at a right angle beneath the cle.
jacking point.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the portunity and correct as needed.
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. 4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is
with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm Concept
above ground. In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
323
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended 3. Remove the cover.
for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
correct it as needed.
Safety information 4. Open the ratchet strap at the clasp, arrow 1.
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐
sions. When driving with an emergency wheel,
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an
accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 5. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well, arrow 2.
Overview Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Place the emergency wheel in the storage
well.
2. Tie the ratchet strap. Make sure that it is cor‐
rectly and firmly seated.
3. Install the cover.
4. Lift the cargo floor panel up slightly and fold
in the multi-function hook.
5. Lower the cargo floor panel and fold it toward
The emergency wheel and the wheel change the rear.
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel

1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel for‐
ward.
2. Lift the cargo floor panel up and attach it to
the folded-down multi-function hook.
324
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

2 Oil filler neck 6 Filler neck for washer fluid
3 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
325
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
WARNING clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐ NOTICE
sonal and property damage. The manufacturer Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐ property. Make sure that the wipers with the
partment be performed by a dealer’s service wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
center or another qualified service center or re‐ the windshield before opening the hood.
pair shop.
NOTICE
WARNING
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ both sides. Pressing again can damage the
ing components. Certain components in the hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
engine compartment can also move with the Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator ically. Avoid pressing again.
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts. Opening
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an ac‐
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
cident. Stop immediately and correctly close
arrow 2.
the hood.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
326
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
327
MOBILITY Engine oil
Engine oil
NOTICE
options Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
your driving style and driving conditions. ing principles:
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ▷ Monitoring.
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. ▷ Detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the When making frequent short-distance trips or
following situations, for example: using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
▷ Sporty driving style. taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
▷ Break-in of the engine. detailed measurement.
▷ Idling of the engine.

Monitoring
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable. Concept
Different Check Control messages appear on the The engine oil level is monitored electronically
Control Display depending on the engine oil while driving and can be shown on the Control
level. Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
Safety information operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
NOTICE gine oil pressure is too low.
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to Functional requirements
property. Immediately add engine oil.
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
328
Engine oil MOBILITY
Displaying the engine oil level 4. "Measure engine oil level"

Via iDrive: 5. "Start measurement"
1. "My Vehicle" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
2. "Vehicle status"
The engine oil level is displayed. Adding engine oil
System limits General information
When making frequent short-distance trips or Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, be added is indicated in the message shown on
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long the Control Display.
trip is displayed.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 330.
Detailed measurement
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Concept
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
Safety information
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed. WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
General information coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
creased somewhat. low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
Functional requirements with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
NOTICE
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
ature.
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
329
MOBILITY Engine oil
Safety information
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or NOTICE
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ tives.
repair shop.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
Overview the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
partment, refer to page 325. make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 326.
Suitable engine oil types
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Diesel engine
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap. BMW Longlife-12 FE.
Alternative engine oil types

Engine oil types to add If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
General information with the following oil rating can be added:
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the Oil rating
engine.
API SL.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
API SM.
API SN.
330
Engine oil MOBILITY
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
Viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable for

diesel engines.
More information about suitable oil ratings and
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.

have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
331
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and Coolant level
options
General information
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cool‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. ing circuits. Always check the coolant levels of
It also describes features that are not necessarily both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.
The coolant level is indicted using minimum and
maximum markings. Depending on the coolant
reservoir, the minimum and maximum markings
are located at different locations.
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
General information side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 325.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ Checking the coolant level on the
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐ side markings
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center 1. Let the engine cool.
or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Open the hood, refer to page 326.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
Safety information the minimum and maximum marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling system Maximum.
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
Minimum.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
Checking the coolant level in the
filler neck
WARNING 1. Let the engine cool.
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives 2. Open the hood, refer to page 326.
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes sure to dissipate, then open it.
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
only.
332
Coolant MOBILITY
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between

the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
6. Close the cap.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the cap.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
333
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service requirements, refer to
page 146, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Service data in the remote
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected control
options or country versions. This also applies to Information on the required maintenance is con‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable er’s service center can read this data out and
laws and regulations must be observed. suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
BMW maintenance system recently.
The maintenance system indicates required

maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Storage periods
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
tional reliability of the vehicle. was disconnected are not taken into account.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
separately. Further information is available from a sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ activated-charcoal filter.
ice center or repair shop.
Service and Warranty

Condition Based Service Information Booklet for US
CBS models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
Canadian models
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
amount of maintenance corresponding to your additional information on service requirements.
user profile.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
334
Maintenance MOBILITY
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular Position

maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
before locking the vehicle. checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Safety information
Emissions
NOTICE ▷ The warning light lights up:
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
cate component intended to be used in con‐ vehicle checked as soon as possible.
junction with specialized equipment to check
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
cumstances:
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in the engine.
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
risks of personal and property damage. Given tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
strongly recommends that access to the socket ously damage emission control components,
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's in particular the catalytic converter.
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
335
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and Replacing the front wiper blades
options 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms, refer to page 130.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the windshield.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. til it you hear it snap into the holder.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
5. Fold down the wipers.
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
336
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing the rear wiper blade Headlight glass

The wiper blade is engaged at the end of the Condensation can form on the inside of the
wiper arm. headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
blade, arrow. light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Safety information
WARNING
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact
must engage audibly. with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk
of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
3. Fold down the wipers.
cooled off.
Lights and bulbs

WARNING
General information Work on switched-on lighting systems can

cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When working on
Lights and bulbs
the lighting system, switch off the lights in
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
to vehicle safety. turer's instructions.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
WARNING
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
look directly into the headlights or other light
that you let a dealer’s service center or another
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s serv‐
NOTICE
repair shop. Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new
Follow the safety information, refer to page 337.
bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth
or something similar, or hold the bulb by its
base.
337
Front lights Replacing a bulb

1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer
LED headlights tabs and fold down the cover.
General information
The low-beam headlights, side lights, and day‐
time running lights and the turn signals in the ex‐
terior mirror feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
or repair shop.
2. Unscrew and remove the bulb holder.
Overview
3. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,

1 High beams/headlight flasher turn counterclockwise and remove it.
2 Low beams 4. Insert the new bulb.
3 Turn signal 5. Mount the bulb holder.
4 Daytime running lights/parking lights 6. Mount the lid.
High beams, bulb replacement

Turn signal, bulb replacement
General information
General information
55-watt bulb, H7.
24-watt bulb, PY24W
338
Replacing a bulb Overview

2. Unscrew the lid counterclockwise and re‐
move it.
1 Cornering light
2 Daytime running lights/parking lights
3 Low beams/high beams
3. Pull the bulb holder out past the spring resist‐ 4 Turn signal
ance point.
Turn signal, bulb replacement
General information
24-watt bulb, PY24W
4. Pull off the bulb.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Make sure that the connector is correctly
seated.
LED headlights with enhanced

features
General information
All front lights are designed with LED technol‐
ogy, with the exception of the two turn signals.
or repair shop.
339
Replacing a bulb Tail lights

1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer
tabs and fold down the cover. General information
With LED headlights or LED headlights with en‐
hanced features: the rear light features LED
technology.
With Adaptive LED headlights: all tail lights fea‐
ture LED technology.
or repair shop.
2. Unscrew and remove the bulb holder.
Overview

turn counterclockwise and remove it. 1 Brake light
4. Insert the new bulb. 2 Turn signal
5. Mount the bulb holder. 3 Tail lights
6. Mount the lid. 4 Reversing lights
5 Lower brake lights
Adaptive LED headlights
Exterior tail lights, bulb replacement
All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s General information
or repair shop.
Brake lights, turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
LED front fog lights Lower brake lights: 21 W bulb, H21W.
LED front fog lights are made using LED tech‐
nology.
or repair shop.
340
Removing the exterior tail light 5. Loosen the screw and remove the holder.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle
tool kit to loosen the clip, arrow 1, and re‐
move the cover, arrow 2.
6. Remove the connector, arrow 1, and loosen

the screw, arrow 2.
3. Release both nuts.
7. Detach the tail light from the body.
Replacing the bulbs

4. Open the cover on the side trim in the cargo 1. Loosen the four fasteners on the bulb holder,
area, arrow, and remove the warning triangle, arrow 1, and detach the bulb holder from the
refer to page 344. tail light, arrow 2.

turn counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder is engaged in all fas‐
teners.
341
Installing the tail light More information about the battery can be re‐
1. Install the tail light in reverse order of removal quested from a dealer’s service center or another
and attach the connector. qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Install the holder for the warning triangle and The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
attach the warning triangle. that you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
3. Close the cover on the side trim in the cargo
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
area.
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
4. Fasten the cover with the clip. registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐
able without restriction and any Check Control
Reversing light in the tailgate messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐
tures will disappear.
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to page 337. Safety information
21-watt bulb, H21W.
WARNING
Access to the light
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
1. Open the tailgate. damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip, arrow. functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.
Charging the battery
General information
Replacing a bulb Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
1. Pull the bulb holder out of the reflector.
usable for its full service life.
turn counterclockwise and remove it. A discharged battery is indicated by a red
indicator light.
3. To insert the new bulb and attach the bulb
holder, proceed in reverse order of removal. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
Vehicle battery ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.

▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
342
Safety information Fuses

NOTICE Safety information
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
WARNING
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
damage to property. Only connect battery trical lines and components. There is a risk of
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
aid terminals in the engine compartment. not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
Accessing the fuses
starting aid terminals, refer to page 348, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Memory function: store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
Open the cover on the right side trim.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. The fuse box is located behind the sound insula‐
tion.
Disposing of old batteries Information on the fuse types and locations, as

well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
Replacing fuses
them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
transport and storage. Secure the battery so that
fied service center or repair shop replace the
it does not tip over during transport.
fuses.
343
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand cover in the cargo area.
cific and optional features offered with the series. 1. Open the cover on the left side trim.
Hazard warning flashers

2. Open the bracket and take the warning trian‐
gle out in the direction of the car's interior.
The button is located in the center console.

The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
344
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Storage 2. "BMW Assist"

3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance of
the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if needed.
Select to dial the telephone number on a
connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
cover in the cargo area. portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
To open, pull on the handle. mitted automatically.
Starting Teleservice Help

BMW Roadside Assistance Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help
enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle
via wireless transmission.
Concept
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if through the Service Specialist.
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
General information 3. Control Display is switched on.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ 4. "Teleservice Help"
cle's condition is sent directly to the manufac‐
The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored
turer of your vehicle.
for specific functions.
Contact can also be made via a Check Control
If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐
message, refer to page 144.
tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be
informed.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
version with Intelligent emergency call or BMW Accident Assistance
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception. Concept
▷ Standby state is switched on. BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an
Starting Roadside Assistance accident.
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. General information
Via iDrive: If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
1. "ConnectedDrive"
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
345
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐

sage appears on the Control Display.
Emergency Request
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
Requirements
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
version with Intelligent emergency call or
tem or manually.
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception. General information
▷ Standby state is switched on. Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
Starting BMW Accident nection with the BMW Response Center.
Assistance
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
If an accident is detected tions.
automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐ Overview
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"BMW Accident Assist."
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages, refer to page 144, for
a certain length of time.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐ SOS button in the roofliner.
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist" Functional requirements
3. "BMW Accident Assistance" ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A ▷ The Assist system is functional.
voice connection is established. ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
4. "End call" emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
The voice connection can be terminated. the vehicle has been activated.
346
Automatic triggering Jump-starting

Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
General information
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐ If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ started using the battery of another vehicle and
ton. two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Manual triggering
1. Touch the cover.
Safety information
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
in the area of the button illuminates green. DANGER
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐ Contact with live components can lead to an
gency Request has been initiated. electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
are under voltage.
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
the voice connection has been established. WARNING
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
lished. of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
ing connection.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
NOTICE
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to In the case of body contact between the two
help you under certain circumstances. vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
Make sure that no body contact occurs.
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current
position of the vehicle, if it can be established.
Preparation
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
BMW Response Center may still be able to
formation can be found on the battery.
hear you.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
sumers in both vehicles.
347
Starting aid terminals battery, or to the corresponding engine or

body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ let it run for several minutes at an increased
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. idle speed.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
A special connection on the body acts as the 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
battery negative terminal. order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
Tow-starting and towing
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle.
Safety information
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
WARNING
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid Due to system limits, individual functions can
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
348
Steptronic transmission: Towing other vehicles

transporting the vehicle
General information
General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
Safety information the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
NOTICE
Safety information
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be WARNING
transported on a loading platform. If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
NOTICE be possible to control the vehicle's response.
There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
and securing it.
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow NOTICE
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
Pushing the vehicle There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
Roll or push, refer to page 133, the vehicle. Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
Tow truck side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
Tow rope
The vehicle should only be transported on a
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
loading platform.
the tow rope is taut.
349
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the Screw thread for tow fitting
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
For covers which have an opening instead of a
marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried

in the vehicle. Tow-starting
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or Do not tow-start the vehicle.
rear of the vehicle. Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle page 347, if possible.
tool kit, refer to page 336. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐ rected by a dealer’s service center or another
hicle and screw it all the way in. qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
350
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 in/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features that are not necessarily 31.5 in/80 cm.
options or country versions. This also applies to Automatic vehicle washes
ing these functions and systems, the applicable Safety information
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
General information damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
is raised. those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
vehicle. higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
Steam blaster and high-pressure ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
washer
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
Safety information the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
NOTICE
tem.
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
351
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a vehicle wash with a Completely remove all residues on the windows,
Steptronic transmission to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Safety information
Vehicle care
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Vehicle care products
gaged when standby state is switched off.
General information
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
General information products are available from a dealer’s service
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll center or another qualified service center or re‐
freely. pair shop.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 133.
Safety information
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A WARNING
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
the vehicle. gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Driving out of a vehicle wash the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
cle. structions on the container.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 120.
Vehicle paint
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use General information
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance value retention. Environmental influences in
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
water. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
scraper. extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
After washing the vehicle grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can or discolored.
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
352
Care MOBILITY
Safety information Clean the upholstery down to the seams using

large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
WARNING
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint Safety information
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to NOTICE
property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐ can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
formed by a dealer’s service center or another damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
qualified service center or repair shop only. fasteners are closed.
Matte finish Caring for special components

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
face. nents, such as the brake disc.
To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries
roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
grease will gradually break down the protective
water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly
layer of the leather surface.
when they have been exposed to road salt.
Upholstery material care Rubber components

General information Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
cleaner.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
with a suitable interior cleaner. vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
353
MOBILITY Care
Fine wood parts Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ installed belt straps.
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
cloth. they are dry.
Kenaf Carpets and floor mats

Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐
ble care products. WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
Plastic components pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
NOTICE the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
with water.
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
▷ Roofliner. terior for cleaning.
▷ Light lenses. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
▷ Matt black spray-coated components. crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
in the direction of travel only.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water. Mount for trailer hitch
Do not soak the roofliner. Keep the mount clean.
Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding surfa‐
Safety belts ces with resin-free greases or oils.
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
WARNING cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt and insert the cover into the mount.
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Sensor/camera lenses
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
safety belts. moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
354
Care MOBILITY
Displays, screens, and protective

glass of the Head-up Display
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 154, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
or repair shop.
355
356
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 358
Appendix ................................................................................................... 361
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 362
357
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X3
Width with mirrors in/mm 84.2/2,138
Width without mirrors in/mm 74.4-74.7/1,891-1,897
Height in/mm 66/1,676
Length in/mm 185.9-186.1/4,722-4,726
Wheelbase in/mm 112.8/2,864
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4-39.7/12.0-12.1
358
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X3 sDrive30i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,203/2,360
Load lbs/kg 893/405
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,020/1,370
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
X3 xDrive30i
Load lbs/kg 893/405
X3 M40i powered by BMW M
Load lbs/kg 915/415
Trailer towing
X3 sDrive30i
Details about possible increases or a reduced trailer load can be requested from a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or repair shop
Trailer load without brakes lbs/kg 1,653/750
Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to 12 % lbs/kg 4,409/2,000
359
REFERENCE Technical data
X3 sDrive30i
Maximum drawbar nose weight lbs/kg 441/200
X3 xDrive30i
X3 M40i powered by BMW M
Capacities
BMW X3
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 17.2/65.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 290.
360
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
361
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alarm system 96
Alarm, unintentional 97
A/C button, see Air conditioning 238 Alertness Assistant 190
ABS, Antilock Brake System 192 All-season tires, see Winter tires 303
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 136 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 194
Accessories and parts 10 Ambient air package 245
Accident Assistance 345 Ambient light 162
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 189 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 131
ACC, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go Antilock Brake System, ABS 192
function 199 Anti-slip control, see DSC 192
Activated charcoal filter 241 Anti-theft protection, locking 77
Activating trailer towing 277 Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 321
Active Blind Spot Detection 181 Apple CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 67
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Approach control warning with City light braking
ACC 199 function 169
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Approach control warning with light braking func‐
sion 233 tion 169
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 168 Approved axle load 359
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 213 Approved total weight 359
Active Protection 189 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Active seat ventilation 113 tertainment, Communication 8
Adaptive brake assistant 192 Ashtray 252
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐ Ashtray, front 252
play 189 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
Adaptive Light Control 159 tant 192
Adaptive M chassis 233 Assistance with breakdown 344
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 138 AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 239
Adaptive suspension 233 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Additives, engine oil types 330 tertainment and Communication 8
After run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ AUTO H button, see Parking brake 124
ter 272 Automatic activation, see Individual activa‐
Airbags 164 tion 113
Airbags, indicator and warning light 166 Automatic climate control 234, 237
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐
mode 236, 239 tion 199
Air conditioning 235, 238 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 110
Air distribution, manual 236, 240 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
Air flow, automatic climate control 236, 240 bags 166
Air outlets, see Ventilation 241 Automatic Differential Brake 195
Air pressure, tires 296 Automatic headlight control 158
362
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 124 Brake Controller 278

Automatic locking 95 Brake discs, breaking in, see Brake system 270
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 239 Brake force display 189
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Brake lights, brake force display 189
mission 132 Brake lights, see Lights and bulbs 337
Automatic unlocking 95 Brake pads, breaking in, see Brake system 270
Automatic vehicle wash 351 Brake system 270
AUTO program, automatic climate con‐ Braking, information 272
trol 235, 238 Breakdown assistance 344, 345
AUTO program, intensity 239 Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 317
Auto Start/Stop function 121 Break-in 270
Average speed and average consumption 152 Break recommendation, see Alertness Assis‐
Axle loads, weights 359 tant 190
Brightness, Control Display 61
B Bulb replacement, see Lights and bulbs 337
Bulbs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 337
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 103 Buttons on the steering wheel 36
Backrest, seats 102 Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 346
Backrest tilt 103 Button, Start/Stop 120
Backrest, width 104 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 347
Bad road trips 271
Bandages, see First-aid kit 344 C
Bar for tow-starting/towing 349
Battery, changing, remote control of the vehi‐ Cable for tow-starting/towing 349
cle 79 Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Battery, disposing of 343 Entertainment, Communication 8
Battery, vehicle 342 California Proposition 65 Warning 10
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 348 Calling up mirror adjustment 95
Belts, see Safety belts 104 Calling up seat adjustment 95
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 258 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Biodiesel 291 gent Safety 168
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 99 Camera-based cruise control, see Active Cruise
Bluetooth connection 64 Control with Stop&Go function 199
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Camera lenses, care 354
Entertainment, Communication 8 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround
BMW Advanced Diesel 292 View 215
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Camera, see Surround View 218
Entertainment and Communication 8 Can holder, see Cup holders 258
BMW display key 81 Care, Head-up Display 355
BMW display key, malfunction 84 Care of displays, screens 355
BMW Gesture Control 53 Care, see Washing the vehicle 351
BMW maintenance system 334 Care, vehicle 352
Bonus range, ECO PRO 282 Cargo area 260
Bottle holder, see Cup holders 258 Cargo area, enlarging 264
Brake assistant 192 Cargo area, loading, see Stowing and securing
Brake assistant, adaptive 192 cargo 261
363
Cargo area partition net 266 Cigarette lighter, front 253

Cargo area, storage compartments 262 Cleaning displays, screens 355
Cargo cover 266 Cleaning, Head-up Display 355
Cargo, stowing and securing 261 Climate control 234, 237
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Clothes hooks 259
area 261 Coasting 283
Carpet, care 354 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 67 ing 283
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 115 Coasting with idling engine 283
Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Cold starting, see Starting the engine 120
age 245 Combination switch, see Turn signals 127
Car wash 351 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
Car washing 351 tem 128
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Comfort Access 86
tem 271 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 137
CBS Condition Based Service 334 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Entertainment and Communication 8 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 323
Center armrest 258 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 44
Center console 38 Compartments in the doors 257
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 64
Display 46 Compressor 306
Central locking system 86 Computer, see Onboard Computer in the instru‐
Central screen, see Control Display 46 ment cluster 150
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Changing parts 336 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Changing wheels 319 Condensation, removing from the win‐
Changing wheels/tires 302 dows 236, 240
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
ber 14 cle 273
Check Control 141 Condition Based Service CBS 334
Checking the engine oil level electronically 328 Confirmation signal from the vehicle 95
Checking the oil level electronically 328 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Children, seating position 115 gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Children, transporting safely 115 Connecting device 63
Child restraint system LATCH 117 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 253
Child restraint systems, mounting 116 Connecting, mobile devices 63
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ Connecting mobile phone 63
dren safely 115 Connecting smartphone 63
Child safety locks 119 Connecting telephone 63
Child seat, mounting 116 Connections, Screen Mirroring 68
Child seats, see Transporting children Consumption display, ECO PRO 282
safely 115 Consumption, see Current consumption 151
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 353 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Chrome surfaces, care 353 Entertainment, Communication 8
Cigarette lighter 252 Container for washer fluid 131
364
Continued driving with a flat tire 315, 319 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 244
Control Display 46 Destination distance, Onboard Computer 151
Control Display, settings 59 Device list, displaying 69
Controller 46, 47 Devices, managing 69
Control systems, driving stability 192 Diagnosis connection 335
Convenient closing with the remote control 78 Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures 292
Convenient opening with the remote control 77 Diesel exhaust fluid, having refilled 292
Coolant 332 Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum 292
Coolant level 332 Diesel exhaust fluid, see BMW Advanced Die‐
Coolant temperature 145 sel 292
Cooling, maximum 238 Diesel fuel 291
Cooling system 332 Diesel particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu‐
Cornering light 159 late filter 272
Corrosion on brake discs 273 Digital clock 146
Cosmetic mirror 252 Dimensions 358
Crossing traffic warning 230 Dimmable exterior mirrors 110
Cruise control 197 Dimmable interior mirror 110
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
tion 199 buttons 52
Cruise control with distance control, see Active Direction indicator, see Turn signals 127
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 199 Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
Cruise control without distance control, see play 154
Cruise control 197 Display key, malfunction 84
Cruising range 146 Display key, see BMW display key 81
Cup holder 258 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 161
Cup holder, front 258 Displays 140
Cup holder, rear 259 Displays and symbols 8
Current consumption, Onboard Computer, con‐ Displays, ECO PRO 282
sumption indicator, Onboard Computer 151 Displays, screens 355
Disposal, coolant 333
D Disposal, vehicle battery 343
Distance control, see PDC 211
Damage, tires 302 Distance to destination, Onboard Computer 151
Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐ Divided screen view, see Split screen 45
sion 233 Door opening angle, Surround View 221
Data memory 11 Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐
Data protection, settings 62 trol 195
Data, see Deleting personal data in the vehi‐ Drawbar nose weight 359
cle 62 Drive-off assistant 192
Data, technical 358 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 192
Date 60 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 168
Daytime running lights 159 Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby
DCC, see Cruise control 197 state 41
Defogging the windows 236, 240 Drive-ready state, see Starting the engine 120
Defrosting the windows 236, 240 Driver Fatigue Detector 190
Deleting personal data 62 Driver profiles 92
365
Driver profiles, welcome screen 92 Emergency wheel 323

Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 168 Energy recovery, Onboard Computer 151
Driving comfort 233 Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 147
Driving Dynamics Control 137 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 121
Driving instructions, break-in 270 Engine compartment 325
Driving mode, ECO PRO 280 Engine compartment, working in 326
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Engine coolant 332
trol 137 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 283
Driving notes, general 271 Engine oil 328
Driving on bad roads 271 Engine oil, adding 329
Driving on racetracks 274 Engine oil change 331
Driving stability control systems 192 Engine oil filler neck 329
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 284 Engine oil temperature 145
Driving tips 271 Engine oil types to add 330
Drying air, see Air conditioning 235, 238 Engine start, jump-starting 347
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 192 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 120
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 194 Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 120
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Engine temperature 145
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐ for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
sion 233 tion 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 192 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 194 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 8
E Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
ECO PRO 280 Entry comparison, navigation 44
ECO PRO bonus range 282 Equipment, interior 249
ECO PRO displays 282 Error displays, see Check Control 141
ECO PRO driving style analysis 284 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 192
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Evasion assistance 173
Control 137 Exchanging wheels/tires 302
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 137 Exhaust gas particulate filter 272
Efficient4x4, see xDrive 194 Exhaust gas system 271
Electronic oil measurement 328 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 271
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 192 Exterior lighting during unlocking 77
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 78
Entertainment, Communication 8 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 110
Emergency brake function when parking, Active Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 110
PDC 213 Exterior mirrors 109
Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐ Exterior mirrors, malfunction 109
tance 345 External start 347
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐ External temperature 146
tance 345 Eyelet for towing 350
Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 289 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 261
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 136
366
F Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 167

Front seats 102
Failure message, see Check Control 141 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 317
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Fuel 290
alarms 97 Fuel cap 288
Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ Fuel filler flap 288
ter 272 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 289
Fan, see Air flow 236, 240 Fuel gage 145
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 104 Fuel quality 290
Filler neck for engine oil 329 Fuel recommendation 290
Filter, see Microfilter 237 Fuel, tank capacity 360
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations Fuses 343
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ G
tion 8
Fine wood parts, care 354 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
First-aid kit 344 Remote Control 249
Fittings for trailer safety chain, trailer towing 278 Gasoline 290
Flat tire, changing wheels 319 Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas partic‐
Flat tire, continued driving 315, 319 ulate filter 272
Flat tire message, FTM 317 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 132
Flat tire message, TPM 313 Gear shift indicator 147
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 317 General driving notes 271
Flat tire, repairing 305 General settings 59
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 310 Gesture Control 53
Flat tire warning light, FTM 317 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 53
Flat tire warning light, TPM 313 Glare shield, see Sun visor 252
Flooding 272 Glass sunroof, electric 99
Floor carpet, care 354 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 101
Floor mats, care 354 Glove compartment 256
Fog, removing from the windows 236, 240 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 60
Fold-away position of the wipers 130 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Fold back rear seat backrests 264 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Foot brake 272 Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 359
For Your Own Safety 9
Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ H
age 245
Fragrance, see Ambient air package 245 Handbrake, see Parking brake 124
Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 245 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 250
Front airbags 164 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Front center armrest 258 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Front fog lights 161 Hazard warning flashers 344
Front fog lights, see Lights and bulbs 337 HDC Hill Descent Control 195
Front lights, see Lights and bulbs 337 Head airbags 164
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ Headlight control, automatic 158
vation 166 Headlight courtesy delay feature 158
367
Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching iDrive 44

on 79 Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
Headlight flasher 127 trol 141
Headlight glass 337 Individual activation 113
Headlights, care 352 Individual air distribution 236, 240
Headlights, see Lights and bulbs 337 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 92
Head restraints, front 106 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
Head restraints, rear 107 charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Head-up Display 154 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Head-up Display, care 355 Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure
Head-up Display, see Memory function 111 Monitor TPM 310
Head-up Display, standard view 154 Inflation pressure, tires 296
Heated steering wheel 111 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 317
Heated steering wheel, individual activation 113 Information 8
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 261 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 317
Height, vehicle 358 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 312
High-beam Assistant 160 Instrument cluster 140
High beams 127 Instrument lighting 161
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ Integrated key 84
tant 160 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 72
Hill Descent Control HDC 195 Integrated Universal Remote Control 249
Hills 273 Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 123
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 192 Intelligent emergency call 346
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 258 Intelligent Safety 168
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Intended use 9
Control 249 Intensity, AUTO program 239
Homepage 8 Interior equipment 249
Hood 326 Interior lights 161
Horn 36 Interior lights during unlocking 77
Hot exhaust gas system 271 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Interior mirror 109
Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 110
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Interior motion sensor 97
glass 337 Internet connection 67
Hydroplaning 272 Internet page 8
Intersection warning, see Approach control warn‐
I ing with light braking function 169
Interval display, see Service requirements 146
iBrake – PostCrash 190 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi‐
Ice warning, see External temperature 146 cle 72
Icy roads, see External temperature 146 Ionization, see Ambient air package 245
Identification marks, tires 300
Identification number, see Vehicle identification J
number 14
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready Jacking points for the vehicle jack 322
state 41 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 100
368
Jam protection system, windows 98 Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 337
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 132 Lights 157
Jump-starting 347 Lights and bulbs 337
Jump-starting terminals 348 Light switch 157
List of all messages 61
K Load 261
Loading 260
Kenaf, care 354 Location, vehicle position 60
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 86 Locking, automatic 95
Key, mechanical 84 Locking, see Opening and Closing 76
Key, see BMW display key 81 Locking, settings 94
Key, see Remote control 76 Locking using the remote control 77
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 132 Lock, lug bolts 321
Knee airbag 165 Locks, child safety 119
Low beams 157
L Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 160
Label on recommended tires 303 Lower back support 103
Lane change assistant 209 Low-Sulfur Diesel 291
Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane Lug bolt lock 321
control assistant 206 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Lane control assistant with active side collision rack 274
protection, see Side collision warning 185 Lumbar support 103
Lane departure warning 178
Lane lines, Surround View 221 M
Lane threshold, warning 178
Language, setting on the Control Display 59 Maintenance 334
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 261 Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based
LATCH child restraint fixing system 117 Service CBS 334
Launch Control 136 Maintenance, see Service requirements 146
Leather care 353 Maintenance system, BMW 334
LED light carpet, see Welcome light 158 Make-up mirror 252
LEDs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 337 Malfunction, BMW display key 84
Length, vehicle 358 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 141
Letters and numbers, entering 49 Malfunction, remote control 80
License plate light, see Lights and bulbs 337 Manual air distribution 236, 240
Light-alloy wheels, care 353 Manual air flow 236, 240
Light control, adaptive 159 Manual brake, see Parking brake 124
Light-emitting diodes, replacing, see Lights and Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 132
bulbs 337 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 289
Lighter, cigarettes 252 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Lighting 157 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Marking, run-flat tire 304
Detection 181 Matte finish 353
Light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic Maximum cooling 238
warning 230
369
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Net, cargo area 263
Info 148 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 353
Maximum speed of winter tires 303 New wheels and tires 302
M chassis, adaptive 233 Nose weight, see Drawbar nose weight 359
Measurement, units of 60 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 344 Entertainment, Communication 8
Memory function 111 No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 88
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 349
lists 149
Menus, operating, see iDrive 44 O
Messages 61
Messages, see Check Control 141 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 335
Microfilter 237, 241 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 216
Minimum tread depth, tires 301 Obstacle marking, Surround View 221
Mirror 109 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
Mirror, see Memory function 111 grade 291
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ Odometer and trip odometer 151
cle 272 Oil 328
Mobile devices, managing 69 Oil, adding 329
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Oil change 331
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Oil change interval, see Service require‐
Mobility System 305 ments 146
Mode, ECO PRO 280 Oil filler neck 329
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Oil types to add, engine 330
Safety 9 Onboard Computer in the instrument clus‐
Monitor, see Control Display 46 ter 150
Mount for trailer hitch, care 354 Onboard Computer on the Control Display 152
Mounting for trailer hitch 277 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 335
Mounting of child restraint systems 116 Onboard literature, printed 72
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook Onboard vehicle tool kit 336
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ On-call service, see Accident Assistance 345
tion 8 On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 345
Multi-function hook 262 Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, tion 8
Entertainment and Communication 8 Opening and closing 76
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐ Operating concept, iDrive 44
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Operating with the Controller 48
Operation via touchscreen 49
N Outside air, see AUC 239
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐
Navigation data, Onboard Computer 151 ture 145
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
Entertainment and Communication 8 age 355
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 106 Owner's Manual media 72
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 107 Owner's Manual, printed 72
370
P Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐

tion system 98
Paint, vehicle 352 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 46, 47
Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 63
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 96 Q
Panic mode 96
Panorama View, see Surround View 218 Queuing Assistant, see Steering and lane control
Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 99 assistant 206
Parallel Parking Assistant 225
Park Distance Control PDC 211 R
Parked-car ventilation 243
Parking aid, see PDC 211 Racetrack operation 274
Parking Assistant 225 Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐
Parking Assistant Plus, see Surround View 218 ter 272
Parking Assistant, see Parking Assistant 225 Radiator fluid 332
Parking brake 124 Radio-operated remote control, see Remote
Parking lights 157 control 76
Parking with Automatic Hold, see Parking Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
brake 124 tertainment and Communication 8
Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate fil‐ Rain sensor 128
ter 272 Rapeseed-oil methyl ester RME 291
Partition net 266 Rear automatic climate control 242
Parts and accessories 10 Rear collision prevention 188
Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic Rear collision warning, see Rear collision preven‐
Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 110 tion 188
Pathway lines, rearview camera 216 Rear lights, see Lights and bulbs 337
PDC Park Distance Control 211 Rear seat backrest tilt 104
Performance Control 233 Rear seats 104
Performance display, see Sport displays 153 Rearview camera, see Surround View 218
Personal data, deleting 62 Rearview camera, without Surround View 215
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 92 Rear window defroster 237, 241
Person warning with City light braking func‐ Rear window wiper, operation 130
tion 175 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-
Plastic parts, care 354 charcoal filter 241
PostCrash – iBrake 190 Recirculated-air mode 236, 239
Power failure 343 Recommended fuel grade 291
Power windows 98 Recommended tire brands 303
Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor Refueling 288
TPM 310 Remote 3D View 225
Pressure, tires 296 Remote control, additional 79
Pressure warning FTM, tires 317 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
Printed onboard literature 72 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Profiles, see Driver profiles 92 cation 8
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 52 Remote control, integrated key 84
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ Remote control, loss 79
tection system 100 Remote control, malfunction 80
371
Remote control of the vehicle, changing the bat‐ S

tery 79
Remote control, opening/closing 76 Safe braking 272
Remote control, universal 249 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
Remote control with display, malfunction 84 passenger seat 106
Remote control with display, see BMW display Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 106
key 81 Safety belts 104
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Safety belts, care 354
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Safety locks, doors and windows 119
tion 8 Safety package, see Active Protection 189
Removable ball head 277 Safety switch, windows 99
Replacing parts 336 Safety systems, see Airbags 164
Replacing wheels/tires 302 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 168
Reporting safety malfunctions 15 Saving fuel 279
RES CNCL button, see Active Cruise Control Screen Mirroring, connection 68
with Stop&Go function 199 Screen, see Control Display 46
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 197 Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 336
Reserve warning, see Range 146 Sealant, see Mobility System 305
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 312 Seat heating 112
Retreaded tires 303 Seat heating, individual activation 113
Reversing lights, bulb replacement, see Lights Seating position for children 115
and bulbs 337 Seat, see Memory function 111
RME rapeseed-oil methyl ester 291 Seats, front 102
Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐ Seats, rear 104
tance 345 Seat ventilation, active 113
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐ Seat ventilation, individual activation 113
tance 345 Securing cargo 261
Roadside parking lights 158 Selection list in instrument cluster 149
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 99 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 132
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 250 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 304
RON recommended fuel grade 291 Sensors, care 354
Roofliner 39 Service and warranty 11
Roof load capacity 359 Service Center, see Accident Assistance 345
Roof-mounted luggage rack 274 Service requirements 146
Rope for tow-starting/towing 349 Service requirements, see Condition Based
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Service CBS 334
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
RSC Run-flat System Component, see Run-flat for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
tires 304 tion 8
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ SET button, see Active Cruise Control with
tertainment, Communication 8 Stop&Go function 199
Rubber components, care 353 SET button, see Cruise control 197
Run-flat tire 304 Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 199
Settings, locking/unlocking 94
Settings on Control Display 59
372
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 132 SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 137
Side airbag 164 Sport steering, variable 196
Side collision warning 185 Stability control systems 192
Side protection, Surround View 221 Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and
Side protection without Surround View 214 options 9
Signaling, horn 36 Standard view, Head-up Display 154
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ Standby state, idle state and drive-ready
nals from the vehicle 95 state 41
Sitting safely 102 Start/stop, automatic function 121
Sizes, see Dimensions 358 Start/Stop button 120
Ski and snowboard bag 267 Starting aid terminals 348
Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 99 Starting, see Drive-ready state 120
Smallest turning radius 358 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 120
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Entertainment and Communication 8 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Smoker's package 252 Status control display, tires 311
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Status field symbols 45
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Status information, iDrive 45
cation 8 Status of Owner's Manual 9
SMS text message, supplementary 144 Status, vehicle 153
Snow chains 309 Steering and lane control assistant incl. Traffic
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 335 Jam Assist 206
Sockets 253 Steering wheel, adjusting 111
Software update 70 Steering wheel, buttons 36
Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate Steering wheel, see Memory function 111
filter 272 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 346 transmission 132
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Steptronic transmission 132
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 120
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 323 Storage compartment in the center console 257
Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐ Storage compartments in the cargo area 262
tions 9 Storage compartments, locations 256
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 148 Storage, tires 304
Speed Limit Info 148 Storing the vehicle 355
Speed, see Average speed and average con‐ Stowing and securing cargo 261
sumption 152 Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
Speed warning 153 area 261
Split screen 45 Suitable devices 64
Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M chas‐ Suitable mobile phones 64
sis 233 Summer tires, tread 301
Sport displays 153 Sun visor 252
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Supplementary Owner's Manuals 72
Control 137 Supplementary SMS text message 144
SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Surround View 218
trol 137 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Sport program, Steptronic transmission 132 trol 137
373
Swinging of trailer, see Trailer stabilization con‐ Tires and wheels 296
trol 277 Tires, changing 302
Switches, see Cockpit 36 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 305
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ Tire settings 310
ics Control 137 Tires, run-flat 304
Symbols and displays 8 Tire tread 301
SYNC program, automatic climate control 240 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 8
T Tool 336
Torque display, see Sport displays 153
Tachometer 145 Touchpad 51
Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐ Touchscreen 49
vation 88 Tow bar 349
Tailgate via remote control 78 Tow fitting 350
Tail lights, see Lights and bulbs 337 Towing 348
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9 Tow rope 349
Technical data 358 Tow-starting 348
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 310
Entertainment and Communication 8 Traction control 194
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ TRACTION, driving dynamics 194
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Traffic Jam Assist, see Steering and lane control
Temperature, automatic climate con‐ assistant 206
trol 235, 238 Trailer hitch, care 354
Temperature display, see External tempera‐ Trailer hitch, rearview camera 216
ture 146 Trailer hitch, removable ball head 277
Temperature, engine oil 145 Trailer hitch, Surround View 221
Tensioning straps, cargo area 263 Trailer loads 359
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 96 Trailer stabilization control 277
Thigh support, sport seat 103 Trailer towing 275
Tilt alarm sensor 97 Trailer towing, activation 277
Tilt, backrest 103 Trailer towing, technical data 359
Tilting the passenger's side mirror, see Auto‐ Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 136
matic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 110 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 132
Time 59 Transporting children safely 115
Time of arrival, Onboard Computer 151 Travel information, see Onboard Computer on
Tire brands, recommended 303 the Control Display 152
Tire damage 302 Tread, tires 301
Tire identification marks 300 Trip computer 152
Tire inflation pressure 296 Triple turn signal activation 127
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat Trip odometer 151
Tire Monitor 317 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 151
Tire pressure 296 Turning circle 358
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 310 Turning circle line, Surround View 221
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 305 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 216
374
Turn signal, indicator light 143 Ventilation 241

Turn signals, bulb replacement, see Lights and Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 243
bulbs 337 Venting, see Ventilation 241
Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 127 Vent, see Ventilation 241
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8 tertainment and Communication 8
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14
U Voice activation system 56
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 97 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Units of measurement 60 cation 8
Universal remote control 249
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 132 W
Unlocking, automatic 95
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 76 Warning against cross traffic 230
Unlocking, settings 94 Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐
Unlocking with the remote control 77 trol 141
Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 271 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Blind Spot Detection 181
Update, software 70 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing
Upholstery material care 353 traffic warning 230
USB connection 66 Warning messages, see Check Control 141
USB interface, position in vehicle 254 Warning triangle 344
Used battery, disposing of 343 Warranty 10
Use, intended 9 Washer fluid 131
Using a smartphone via voice activation 56 Washer nozzles, windshield 129
Washer system 128
V Washing the vehicle 351
Wash view, Surround View 221
Vanity mirror 252 Water on roads 272
Variable sport steering 196 Water, see Condensation water under the parked
Vehicle battery 342 vehicle 273
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ Website 8
tance 344 Weights 359
Vehicle, break-in 270 Welcome light during unlocking 77
Vehicle care 352 Welcome lights 158
Vehicle care products 352 Welcome screen, driver profiles 92
Vehicle features and options 9 Wheelbase, vehicle 358
Vehicle identification number 14 Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 353
Vehicle key, see Remote control 76 Wheels and tires 296
Vehicle paint 352 Wheels, changing 302
Vehicle position, vehicle location 60 Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 317
Vehicle status 153 Width, vehicle 358
Vehicle storage 355 WiFi connection 67
Vehicle wash 351 WiFi hotspot 67
Vehicle, washing 351 WiFi hotspot, see Internet connection 67
375
Window defroster, rear 237, 241

Window, defrosting and defogging 236, 240
Windows, powered 98
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 131
Windshield washer nozzles 129
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
system 128
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 128
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 355
Winter tires 303
Winter tires, tread 301
Wiper blades, replacing 336
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 131
Wiper, fold-away position 130
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 128
Wiper system 128
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Wood parts, care 354
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 44
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 336
xDrive 194
376
*BL289670300N*
01402896703 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL289670300N*
01402896703 ue

2019 BMW x3 19

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 BMW x3 19

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402896703 - X/18

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Additional sources of Symbol Meaning

information Precautions that must be followed in

Symbol Meaning When using these functions and systems, the

1. First action step. Status of the Owner's

Warranty Parts and accessories

Windshield also obtain other information about motor vehicle

For Canadian customers

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Your BMW at a glance

Buttons for the central locking

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

Press the button on the remote control

Seats, mirrors, and steering

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Push switch up or down.

Adjusting the steering wheel Displays and control

1. Fold the lever down.

Driver's door Controller

Buttons on the Controller

1 Safety switch Press once: call up main menu.

4 Opening/closing the tailgate Open the Communication menu.

Open destination input menu for navi‐

Open navigation map.

Press once: open the previous dis‐

Open the Options menu.

iDrive 1. Press the button on the steering

Information for Emergency Parking brake

Switching on drive-ready state

Steptronic transmission Engaging P

End the sport program/manual mode:

Press the button.

High beams, headlight flasher, Lights and lighting

Front fog lights.

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Right roadside parking light.

Left roadside parking light.

▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

Washer/wiper system Rain sensor

Switching the wipers on/off and Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its

Brief wipe and switching off

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

Rear window wiper Button Function

Switching on Recirculated-air mode.

Air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrost and defog window.

Clean the rear window Automatic climate control with

Climate control operation.

Button Function AUTO program.

Air flow, manual.